JP2020058430A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a performance with high amusement.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and a performance is controlled based on the determination result. The Pachinko game machine can execute a stage performance in which a predetermined stage performance image is changed step by step, and when executing the stage performance, displays the stage performance image in a predetermined first display area to start the stage performance. After the start of the stage performance, the Pachinko game machine displays the stage performance image in a second display area different from the first display area to change the stage performance image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that produces an effect based on a determination result of whether to execute a special game.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins in the starting opening, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and when the symbol for informing the determination result is variably displayed, the player Various effects that make a big hit are expected (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP, 2016-163824, A

  By the way, the production performed by the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily a production with high interest, and there is room for improvement in terms of improvement of interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a stage effect that gradually changes a predetermined stage effect image,
When the step effect is executed, the step effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the step effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image is displayed in the first display area when the stage effect is started, the player watching the first display area does not notice the start of the stage effect. It is possible to effectively suppress such a problem. In addition, since the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the stage effect, it is different from the case where the display area in which the stage effect image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to execute a stage production that is rich in interest and highly entertaining. In addition, since the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the stage effect, it is possible to execute another effect using the first display area, for example. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high effect by a synergistic effect of the stage effect and another effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining effect.

It is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the game machine which concerns on the Example of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display unit shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display units included in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the same gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit judgment table, (B) is a big hit type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, (E) is a normal symbol fluctuation It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a universal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric auditors product processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of the special symbol 2 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is the table which shows the design kind of production design. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state A. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state B. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of production mode C, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of production mode D. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of production mode C. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of production design game production of production mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in production mode D, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in production mode D. It is the flowchart of small hit pre-reading production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect | action when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen from before the start of the mode selection period during the big hit game to after the start. (A) is a table showing the types of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing the type of the third effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode D). It is a diagram showing a display example of a notice image in the effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a notice image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the effect | action performed in the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of the effect | action produced in the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of the effect | action performed in the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of the effect | action performed in the low certainty low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the chance increase during SPSP reach. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of rank-up production. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of rank up production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of rank-up production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot reliability of various notice productions, such as rank-up productions. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of 1st countdown production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of 1st countdown production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the feature of the 1st countdown production. It is a screen figure which shows the 1st specific example of 2nd countdown production. It is a screen figure which shows the 2nd specific example of 2nd countdown production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the characteristic of various countdown productions. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect mode in the low accurate low base state. It is the screen figure which shows the concrete example of the production which relates to the large chance production occurrence zone (the 1). It is the screen figure which shows the concrete example of the production which relates to the large chance production generation zone (the 2). It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of a 1st group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display mode of each icon, and the jackpot reliability. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of a 2nd group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of each group notice. It is a screen figure which shows the 1st specific example of button image change production. It is a screen figure which shows the 2nd specific example of button image change production. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of a special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of a special reach production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of special reach production.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. Incidentally, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the variable display of the symbol, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to the player An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on an island facility of a hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. The front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported at one end in the up-down direction (left side in FIG. 1) and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one end as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  Further, in the front frame 51, a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch strength according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and the game ball that stores and stores the game ball can be supplied to the launcher side. A ball hitting tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as "operable by the player during the execution of the game effect that is executed as the game progresses". And is also simply referred to as a “production button 63”). For the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be selectively used according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example, a player directly touching the button portion to input the input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects when a part of the player's body approaches and inputs. Good.

  Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a frame lamp 66 for decoration, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to project toward and is inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similar to the image display device 7 described later, according to the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game performance (characters and effect patterns, etc.), demonstration performance, information about games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability of game production, explanation, etc.) Information relating to the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. In some cases Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. The image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be referred to simply as “image display device”.

  Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game region 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game region 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge part). Has been. Therefore, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured such that it can be rotated to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as an axis, the second image display device 71 provided so as to project in front of the front frame 51 is a pachinko machine. This is a structure for preventing the game machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball lending machine, inter-unit equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and is not rotatable.

  On the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball shot by operating a launch handle 60 flows down is formed surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launcher side.

  An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit") is displayed. ) Is provided, and the design symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in accordance with the game state (low-probability low base state, high-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state) The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. In addition, the effect design 8L is also referred to as "left design", the effect design 8C is also referred to as "middle design", and the effect design 8R is also referred to as "right design".

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low accurate low base state, state A described later). As will be described later in detail, in this low accurate low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting opening (second starting opening 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not the special symbol is true or false. Judgment probability (first special symbol hit determination and second special symbol hit determination) is a low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol It is set (more than 2 times) (out-of-range fluctuation is all 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, rather than shooting a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) to enter the second starting opening 21 and variably display the second special symbol, the left game area 3A (second It is considered advantageous for the player to perform a game in which a game ball is shot in one game area) to enter the first starting opening 20 and the first special symbol is variably displayed. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a game state in which the first special symbol (effect symbol) is displayed as a main variable. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are supposed to perform the variable display and the stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  In addition, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) that represent numbers “1” to “9”, for example. By the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stop-displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display device 41a (see "first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the special symbol display portion), and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display portion"). The result of the variable display of the symbols (the result of the special symbol hit determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and any (or all) of the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol win / loss determination is also simply referred to as “win / win determination” or “first win / loss determination”. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol win / loss determination is also referred to as “win / win determination execution unit” or “first win / loss determination execution unit”.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect design is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit design (doublet) such as "777" (also as "big hit design"). Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a chance design such as "135" or a small hit exclusive design such as "3 ★ 3" (also called "small hit design") The symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when it is a small hit, it may be changed to a mode in which the small hit special design is stopped and displayed, and the small hit design and the symbol of the same pattern may be stopped and displayed. Also, as a small hit, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.), they can be distinguished from each other, and different small hit patterns (first small hit design, second small hit design) ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Further, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is out, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is displayed as a stop symbol of the production symbol with a different symbol ("out symbol"). Also called). Thus, the player can easily understand the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / absence determination) by looking at the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol hit determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, and directing the effect. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is grasped by looking at it. In addition, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc., a mode in which effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, or a first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a and the third effect symbol display portion 72a. In addition to this, you may have the aspect which carries out an effect display using only the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed along with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a customer waiting demonstration effect, etc. are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the winning game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect patterns such as numbers, effect images other than effect patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed. Also, as will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B or state C) or a state in which a game ball is shot in the left game area 3A to perform a game, or a game ball is shot in the right game area 3B. The display pattern on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not the game is played. Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game. The machine is also called "simultaneous fluctuation machine (parallel fluctuation machine)".

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) that displays a first effect hold 9a according to the number of memories of a first special figure hold described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the later-described first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4). And the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect, etc.). In addition, only one of the first effect hold display section and the second effect hold display section (for example, only the effect hold display section corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center ornament 10 is provided so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center ornament 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11 and can enter the first starting opening 20 described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on in accordance with a game state, and a decoration member 13 having characters or figures is arranged. There is.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but, for example, the movable decorative member 14 drops downward (predetermined when the game effect with a relatively high probability of being hit is executed). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the enjoyment of the game and the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 including a non-variable first starting opening 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, a random number for determining the special symbol win / loss, etc. is acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win / loss determination for the first special symbol ( (1st special symbol hit determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a lapse of a predetermined time.

  Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (universal figure starting port, passage port, ball inlet, specific start) (Also called the mouth) is provided. The game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game sensor is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is normally obtained, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, normally. Along with executing the symbol hit determination (also referred to as "second hit determination"), the normal symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination. When the hit ordinary pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol award / non-determination of whether or not to open the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23 (opening action) is referred to as “a / nose determination execution means” or It is also referred to as “second hit / miss determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is exerted when a condition capable of executing a big hit game is established (big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a big hit standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit waiting state) is not satisfied, control processing relating to the normal symbol is performed, and big hit start processing is not executed. Further, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) while the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the big hit game on standby is started and a predetermined big winning opening ( The round game in which the first big winning opening 30) is in an open state (state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the first prize hole 30 is provided in the game area. A special winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and operates the opening / closing member 32 to open / close the first big winning opening 30. The opening and closing member 32 is a game ball passage whose upper surface is a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape). In the closed state, the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is closed and the opening and closing member 32 is on the upper surface. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the drawing). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first special winning opening 30. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the rear surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 enters the first special winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large size. Along with letting the ball enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. The first special winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32, the game ball cannot enter the ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball capable state (open state).

  In the game area on the right side of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3 (right game area 3B) and below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game balls does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game sphere into the third starting opening 26, the random number for special symbol win / loss determination, etc. is acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win / loss determination relating to the second special symbol ( (2nd special symbol hit determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a predetermined time. In addition, the game ball passage is branched (downstream) below the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), the upper-side game ball passage where the third starting opening 26 is provided, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 The lower game ball passage where the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper stage game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26 or the like. Alternatively, it does not enter the third starting port 26 but flows down to the outlet port 34. Further, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed type winning device that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game (so-called first hit), and when the first big hitting game is executed in the right hitting game. , It is possible to enter (hold) the game ball into the third starting port 26 during the big hit game, and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the big hit game.

  In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the easiness of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 of a formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, random numbers for determining the special symbol win / loss, etc. are acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win / loss judgment of the second special symbol (the (2 special symbol hit determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and the second starting opening 21 is opened / closed by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting opening 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (opened state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and cannot enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting opening 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It does not have to be impossible to enter.

  Further, the movable member 23, like the opening / closing member 32, is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface, and in the closed state, closes the entrance of the second starting opening 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting opening solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (vertical direction to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting opening 21 enters the second starting opening 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting opening 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when open) While smoothly entering the ball into the second starting port 21, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is moved in any direction by the inclined upper surface passage (the second big winning port 35 described later). Induce to.

  In addition, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream) the second starting opening 21, the second special winning opening 35 is provided. A special winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 is operated to open / close the second special winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a game ball passage with a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface, and in the closed state, closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 and opens / closes the same. A game ball can pass on the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second special winning opening 35. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the rear surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that has been used disappears from the entrance of the second special winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 will enter the second special winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 for opening / closing the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Smoothly into the second big winning opening 35, and guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. The second special winning opening 35 allows the game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37, the game ball cannot enter the ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball capable state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a plurality of (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left hitting, and the batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right gaming area 3B is called right hitting. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accurate low base state, state A) at the time of starting the game is aimed at entering the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game in which the player enters the first start opening 20 by left-handed ball (first special symbol winning / discarding judgment).

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20, the big hit game, and after the big hit game (special game) ends (low accuracy high base state or high probability The low base state) is a game in which the player hits the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second big winning opening 35 by hitting it to the right. That is, the big hit game, and the low-probability high base state (state B) or the high-probability low base state (state C) is mainly the ball entry into the second starting port 21 by right-handing (the second special symbol hit determination) It becomes a right-handed game. When the game ball enters the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entrance 27, the respective entrances In, a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profits”) are paid out (granted). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (the amount of game profit) paid out on the basis of the balls entered into the first special winning opening 30 is calculated as the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance onto the second special winning opening 35. It is set larger than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 is for paying out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second special winning opening 35 is 10 for one winning ball. The prize balls will be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. On the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that variably displays and stops the first special symbol, a second special symbol display that variably displays and stops the second special symbol. The device 41b (second special symbol display portion), and the normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") variable display and stop display normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) is included. Further, the main display device 40, the first special figure reservation display 43a that displays the number of stored hit determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, the hit determination information (second The second special figure reservation indicator 43b which displays the number of memories of 2 special figure reservation), and the general figure reservation indicator 44 which displays the number of memories of operation suspension (general figure reservation) of the normal design indicator 42 are included. ing.

  Further, the main display 40, the hit indicator 48 showing that the result of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination is a hit, the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 showing the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 showing that the probability variation function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed hitting. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether to fire or left. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display portion 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display section 43.

  In the special symbol display portion 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed for a predetermined period of time after being changed and displayed as a stop, and the special symbol (stop symbol) that has been stopped (derived) is displayed as the first starting port 20 or the second starting port. The result of the winning / discarding judgment (special symbol winning / discarding judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit determination. If the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), in the open pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, when the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of “lo” can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays the special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. Regarding the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit determination. Also, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, in a predetermined order, from left to right. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows.

  Here, in the stop display mode of special symbols and effect symbols (display result of the variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (a big hit or a small hit) "," Specific mode "," specific display mode "or" specific display result ", the result of the special symbol right or wrong determination corresponds to the stop display mode" off mode "," non-specific mode " Also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also called "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is "small. Also referred to as a "hit mode". Further, any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display part), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display part) and the special symbol display part 41 are indicated. Also referred to as "variable display means" and "identification information display means".

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when there is a game ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, various information such as a random number for special symbol win / fail judgment based on the entering ball (“acquired information”). (Also referred to as a “special figure”), and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. More specifically, if the information is acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as a first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”), If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in Embodiment 1 is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage unit" and "second acquisition information storage unit", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage unit". .

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digesting the special figure hold means to determine a random number for special symbol validity determination corresponding to the special figure hold, and execute a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be executed immediately upon the entry, that is, each special During execution of variable display of symbols, or during execution of special games based on any of the special symbol hit / miss judgments, the predetermined number (4 each) is set as the upper limit, and the right of special symbol hit / miss judgment for the entry is reserved (reserved). ) You can do it.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is lit in red, as in “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, as in “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (the upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green such as "uvv" to provide a display mode. In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation is displayed. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □□□" (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings 1 to No. 4 is defined similarly to the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after displaying the normal symbol for a predetermined period of time, the stop symbol is displayed, and the normal symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed is the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. Notify me. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / miss judgment. If the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a specific normal symbol determined in advance (normal normal symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state (“specific game”) (Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of “st”, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment by the lighting mode thereof. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, both LEDs are turned on and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed as in "s.t." (for example, :: lights up, □: lights off). In addition, when the determination result is out, an out-of-normal symbol such as "s □ t ■" in which only the t LED is turned on is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined variation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off repeatedly.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passage of a game ball to the gate 28, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general figure reservation in the general figure reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the public figure hold means that a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol corresponding to the public figure hold is determined and a variable display of the normal symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately when the passage, that is, during the variation display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (reserve) the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is valid for the passage of a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit.

  The number of public figure reservations is displayed on the general figure reservation display 44. Specifically, the universal figure pending display 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of universal figure pending by turning on the LEDs in accordance with the number of universal figure pending. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, as in “q □ r ●”. In addition, the numbers of reservations 2 to 4 are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation indicator 43a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) for performing control relating to game profit such as special symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination, and game state transition. "Game control section"), a sub-control board 90 (also called "sub-control section", "sub-control section", or "production control section") that controls the performance to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a design 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a design displayed on the display 102, a third display pending display 103a, Also, an image control board 100 (image control unit) for performing display control of the fourth effect hold display device 103b and the like is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case that houses a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board storage case that stores the image control board 100 are provided, and a sub control board storage case that stores the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. A payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port section). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the special figure reservation storage section 85 (first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b) and the general figure reservation storage section 86 described above. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

  The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided in the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general ball entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

  As the solenoids, the second starting opening solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, and the second big winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b, the normal symbol display device 42, the first special symbol reservation display device 43a, the second special symbol reservation display device 43b, universal The figure hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game state indicator 46, the firing direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  In addition, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a payout apparatus 120 for paying out prize balls or lent balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching apparatus 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “fire control section”). Are connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert the prepaid card (game It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of gaming balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay prize balls or pay balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact of the player with the launching handle 60, and the launching volume 115 of the launching handle 60 is detected. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display device 102, third effect hold display device 103a, and fourth effect hold display device 103b Control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers and symbols (including effect designs, hold designs, etc.), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs the variable display and the stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED the variable display of the second special symbol. And, the variation display and the stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display mode of the display result (the result of the determination of the special symbol) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by turning on or off the corresponding LED or by the color. Stop display with. Similarly, each of the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b is also composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display device 103a is displayed by the holding number and the first special figure holding display device 43a displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holdings as the number of holdings. In addition, the fourth effect hold display device 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that shows the same hold number as the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. It

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (production design display part), or the movable decorative member 14 is moved in front of the display screen 7a (production design display part) to display the display screen 7a (production design display). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display section 9c, or the second effect hold display section 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, as an auxiliary, so that the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol, the number of held characters, etc. can be surely confirmed. Also, a fourth effect suspension display device 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state in which they are always visible without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. Has become. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the speaker 67 to output voice, music, sound effect, etc. through the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106 and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. It should be noted that the movable decoration member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decoration body 10, although only a part of the movable decoration member 14 is visible. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of the lamp or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The sub-control board 90 also includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90.

  Next, the control relating to the special symbol hit determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". When the "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "off", "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the "special game" of opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol hit determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is the first identification result, the second identification result, the third identification result, or another identification result, etc. , Including small hits). Also, the special game to be executed may be different depending on the hit type, the amount of game profit that can be obtained by the special game may be different, and the game state after the special game may be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R big hit”. There are 5 big hits, 2R 6th big hits, 2R 7th big hits, and 2R 8th big hits. The “15R third jackpot” has 15 times of opening (round number) of the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30). Further, in the “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times (round number) of opening of the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is four. "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" It is twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as "big winning big winning opening (variable big winning opening)".

  Also, "4R 1st big hit", "15R 3rd big hit", "4R 4th big hit", "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit" are game states after the end of the big hit game, To the high probability state of (actuating the probability changing function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variation jackpots (high-probability jackpots)." This high-probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" shifts the game state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function does not operate). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low-probability jackpots, normal jackpots)."

  Also, "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit", after the end of the big hit game, set the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time "second special symbol time saving" Function, but not the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes the highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the playability of the high-accuracy low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period (between big hits) between the previous big hit and the next big hit by making a symbol hit determination. In addition, by frequently making small hits in the highly accurate and low base state during the big hits, it is expected that a large number of game balls can be obtained in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" activates "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low-probability-high base state. In the case of "4R second big hit" and "2R eighth big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. . When the variable display of the special symbol is finished based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). In the case of "2R seventh big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is finished on the basis of being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described later in detail, in the low accurate high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special symbol winning / absence determination is performed, and the next It is a period for playing games in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  Moreover, "2R 5th big hit" and "2R 6th big hit" activate the "2nd special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the completion of these big hit games becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th big hit", "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next big hit occurs, and "high base generation function" causes the next big hit or changes in the special symbol. The display ends 50 times. Further, as described above, the "probability variation function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R fifth big hit", after the big hit game is over, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it is in a highly accurate and high base state, and a big hit does not occur even after 50 times. , The gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state.

  High-probability-high base state, like the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol is judged whether or not there is a chance to hit the next big jackpot. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy low-base state is an advantageous period for the player who can expect a large number of game balls in a short period by small hits by frequently making small hits by right hitting games. is there. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate low base state than there are game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate high base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol after the big hit game has finished reaches 50 times, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit", after the big hit game, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it is in a high-precision high base state, and if the big hit does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as the "2R fifth big hit" except that the gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the "2R fifth big hit" is set earlier than the "2R sixth big hit" when the gaming state changes from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state. Therefore, it can be said that the “2R fifth jackpot” is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the “2R sixth jackpot”.

  In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit" By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of big hit is "2R fifth big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R If the "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player does not inform Regardless of which game state is in the state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low base state to play the game, which enhances the interest of the game.

  In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to "2R sixth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to "2R eighth big hit" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of big hit is "2R 6th big hit", after 100 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R In the case of "eighth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player is not informed. Regardless of which game state is in the state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low base state to play the game, which enhances the interest of the game.

  In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit" High-precision base state and high-precision high-base state after the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit game" In the low accurate high base state after the end, by performing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.), the player recognizes which game state Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set as non-notification states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

  If the type of big hit is "2R fifth big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R In the case of "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player). Also, if the type of big hit is "2R sixth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), In the case of "2R eighth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state when the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times in any game state. , Will enhance the fun of the game.

  In addition, even if it does not shift to the high-accuracy low base state, without expecting to shift to the low-precision low base state, at least the high base state is expected to continue (that is, the non-notification state will continue) I do. After the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, if the non-notification state continues, we expect a big hit, and when the variable display of the special symbol passes 100 times, shift to the high-accuracy low base state. The game is expected to be played, and the interest in the game is enhanced. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points for increasing the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, which makes it possible to further enhance the game enjoyment and maintain the high game enjoyment for a long period of time.

  In addition, as for the small hit which can occur as a result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and once compared with other big hits (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is opened by opening 6 times for 0.3 seconds. Therefore, compared to the big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be small. However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times), it is possible to execute a small hit game a plurality of times and obtain more game balls. In addition, in the case of a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. Therefore, the second special winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small winning big winning opening (small winning variable entrance)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the special winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds but simply the number of times of opening. Also, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the gaming state at the time of a small hit is a high probability state, it will be a high probability state even after the completion of the small hit game. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is a low probability state even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, regarding the time saving function and the high base generating function of the second special symbol, it is assumed that they do not operate based on the occurrence of a small hit.

  In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the 15R third big hit is 50%, the 4R fourth big hit is 5%, the 2R fifth big hit is 5%, the 2R sixth big hit is 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function to be described later, in the case of a big hit by the hit determination (second special symbol hit determination) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 with an increased variation frequency, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to obtain a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. Thus, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than a big hit in the hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) performed by entering the game ball into the first start opening 20, the game to the second start opening 21 It is set so that it is more likely to be a big win for the player in the hit determination (the second special symbol hit determination) performed when the ball enters the ball (it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls). There is. In addition, the player expects the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a highly accurate low base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol win / loss judgment (also referred to as" win / win judgment information ")" The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on "a jackpot type determining random number (also referred to as" symbol determining random number "and" symbol determining information ")". As shown in FIG. 7 (A), the random number for special symbol validity determination takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 includes a random number for determining a special symbol validity and a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variation pattern". There is a random number (also referred to as "variation pattern information"). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers obtained based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol winning / deciding random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a random number for determining whether to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol or not determination). The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and ordinary symbols, and an opening extension function of the second starting opening. Depending on the combination of states, it has a plurality of game states. About the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state not operating is called "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not to win, but in the high-probability state, there is a large number of special symbol random numbers for determining special symbols that are determined to be a jackpot. The table is used to determine whether or not it is true or false (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability change function of the special symbol is activated, the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit (the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), as compared with when it is not activated, the probability is high. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability of the special symbol hit determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

  In addition, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) the state in which the variable time shortening function is operating is called "time saving state", and the non-operating state is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern table that is determined such that the variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective ball entry into the starting opening (ball entry that can be stored as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time-shortening function" as shown in FIG. There is. If the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and inserts a game ball into the second starting opening 21, the second special The symbol special determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), so the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state. Is also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large number of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed as a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), In the state A, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake, without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end, enter the game ball into the first starting opening 20. , The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 9, 2 Because the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, the player does not reduce the number of balls he holds compared to the left-handed game by performing a right-handed game (maintaining or slightly decreasing in state B, state C In, while increasing), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol hit determination, variation game of the second special symbol). Further, in the present embodiment, during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

  Probability variation function and variation time shortening function (second special symbol time saving function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. And, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for ordinary symbols are designed to operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high game base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) and low base state (low accurate low base state, high accurate state). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit determination is higher than the low base state (also referred to as "universal figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (random number per hit) determined to be a hit is for the state B which is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Ordinary symbol hit determination table (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42 is activated, the probability that the variation display of the normal symbol is a hit (the stop symbol is an ordinary hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, in the low base state, when the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second starting port is opened during the operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment in the high base state is a hit, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is supposed to perform the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Also, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. Although the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state in the present embodiment, the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once in 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened 6 times in 1.0 second, and may be made larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. In such a case, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 22 is also called activated.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function for the regular symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not in operation as compared with the low base state. , The period during which the second starting opening 21 is open becomes long (the opening time per unit time becomes long), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting opening 21 becomes high (also called "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol winning / deciding determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

  Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting opening 21 if the opening frequency is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). In addition, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, so the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is that the game ball starts to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. Therefore, the time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state is flowing down, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material forming the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is set to the front side game. The material has a higher friction coefficient than the material that composes the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the speed of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be lower than the speed of the game ball flowing through the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode of reducing the flow-down speed, in addition, the inclination angle may be made gentle, or an inhibiting member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, by this, in the high base state, the game ball that has flown down to the second starting opening 21 does not enter the second starting opening 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big winning opening 35 is opened (the state in which the ball can be entered) due to a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and It is difficult to enter the special winning opening 35.

  The high base state need not operate all of the above functions. That is, by the operation of at least one function of the probability changing function for the regular symbols, the changing time shortening function, and the opening time extending function of the variable winning a prize device 22, the second starting opening more than when the function is not operating. It suffices that 21 is easily opened (frequency of entry is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the special symbol time saving state. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the player determines that the winning judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the judgment determination of the first special symbol, so that the player selects the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low accurate low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low accurate low base state), the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (average variation time). Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game rather than variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0. It is said that. In addition, "the state where the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending second special symbols is "0". It means that.

  In addition, high base state such as high accurate high base state and low accurate high base state, and in the high accurate low base state, due to the 2nd special design time saving function, the fluctuation time of the 2nd special design becomes short time, right hitting game It improves the game efficiency. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by performing a right-handed game and performing a second special symbol winning / absence determination advantageous for the player. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and entering the second starting port 21 is easier than entering the first starting port 20. It is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger of the normal symbol hit / absence judgment, a right strike is performed in order to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 21.

  Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the second starting opening 21 is similar to that in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), but it is executed based on the entering of the second starting opening 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is changing in a short time, the right-handed game capable of executing the second special symbol hit determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol hit determination is performed. Also, in the high-accuracy low-base state, since the probability variation function for the regular symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not operating, the entry into the second starting opening 21 is not possible. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 cannot be obtained as in the high base state. However, instead, by the second special symbol hit determination, by small hits that occur at a high probability (small hit probability: 300/630), it is possible to prevent the game balls from decreasing during the big hits, and rather cause small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls to be held by (generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), by frequently entering the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game, without greatly reducing the ball holding, 2 Aim for the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is valid or not. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintains). Further, in this embodiment, about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game ball is set to enter the second starting opening 21, so unless the ball is inserted into another entering opening, it is a high base. If the condition is maintained for a long period of time, it is designed to reduce the number of balls it holds.

  On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, by the right-handed game, a small hit is generated at a high frequency by the second special symbol hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 to hold the ball in the small hit game. Along with increasing the number, aim for the next big hit by the second special symbol hit determination. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low base state continues), the more the small hits occur. Opportunities (to execute the small hit game) increase, which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board structure and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided with gates 28 (start gate 29), first big winning opening 30, and first entrance from the upstream side of the game area. The second starting opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 are arranged in an optimal order. Moreover, since the game ball downflow passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is in the closed state, most of the game balls shot to the right game area 3B (90% Above) passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second It is configured to flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and down to the out opening 34. Then, if there is an open winning port in the middle of its flow, it enters the winning port, is discharged from the winning port to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is in the downstream game area. It is a non-existent structure.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the opening of the second starting port 21 or the like prevents the game ball from reaching the gate 28. Further, the normal symbol hold becomes "0", and it is possible to prevent waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) from occurring as much as possible. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit to the right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning openings are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down to the downstream side of the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entrance to another winning port.

  When the right hitting game is performed in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and it is determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 21. To be done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning per normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately (after 1 second) after passing through, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol hit determination is executed, and when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting opening 21, 2 The starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is also set to 6.0 seconds once, so as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is closed during the 1-second normal symbol variation time. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then open once for 6.0 seconds, the cycle of repeating (1 second closed → 6 Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

  Therefore, when the right hitting game is performed in the high base state, the second starting opening 21 is almost opened, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the gaming balls flowing down the right playing area 3B are in the second starting opening 21. You will enter the ball. Moreover, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol winning / discarding determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit determination, in the high accuracy high base state, it becomes a big hit with a probability of 1/63, a small hit with a probability of 30/63, and a miss with a probability of 32/63.

  First, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is out, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B, after passing through the gate 28, most (about 80 to 90%) of the game ball is in the open state. Enter the ball into the second starting port 21, other game balls flow down from the game ball passage branched before the second starting port 21 downstream, without flowing down to the second starting port 21, the third starting port It enters the ball 26 or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the second special symbol hit determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one in the second starting port 21, the second special symbol winning / disabling judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is discharged also by entering one in the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode according to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game smoothly passes through the first big winning hole without being blocked by the other winning holes such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting opening 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning opening 30, although it shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, in the present embodiment, the second starting opening 21 is in the low base state. Since it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game entered the second starting opening 21 first and did not enter the second starting opening 21. A situation occurs in which only the game balls enter the second special winning opening 30.

  Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is one, the execution time of the big hit game is unnecessarily lengthened and there is no merit to the player. Rather, the game becomes redundant and the game may not progress smoothly, which may reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, by disposing the first special winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can be smoothly advanced. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 does not open except during the big hitting game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 during the big hitting game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is in the open state in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation for 0.3 seconds is performed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the period. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second starting opening 21 enter the second starting opening 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second special winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, it is a small hit, and even when a small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second big winning on the downstream side is made by the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered and it is difficult to enter the second big winning opening 35. Although the number is small (though unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting opening 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 When the second special winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening 35 if the second special winning opening 35 is in the open state.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The high-probability low-base state is a low-base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not to open the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol winning / absence determination) is executed. In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is about half that of the high base state ( Since 120/240) is set, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting opening 21 is opened after a short time (3 seconds) after the game ball passes through the gate. Becomes Since the probability of hitting is about 1/2, hits and misses occur about half and half.

  That is, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol winning / absence determination is executed, and when the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting opening 21, the second The starting port 21 is opened. Also, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is set to three times of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between opening is 0.1 seconds), so long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is It is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, then it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example in which the hit and the off occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and then opened 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal symbol for 3 seconds It will be closed during the fluctuation time, will be disengaged, and will be closed during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a highly accurate low base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in which it is in the closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, in the highly accurate low base state, the second starting opening 21 is compared with the high base state in which the period in which the second starting port 21 is open is approximately 90% and the period in which the second starting port 21 is closed is approximately 10%. It is highly possible that the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, whether it is in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) or high accurate low base state Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the game state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit determination executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, the small hit only in the result of the second special symbol hit determination executed in the right-handed game ing.

  As described above, in the high-accuracy low-base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting opening 21) enter the second starting opening 21. Without flowing, it flows down to the second special winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, 2 Enter the ball into the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and a small hit game. To enter the second special winning opening 35 in the open state.

  Since the prize balls based on the balls entering the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each single winning, the second special winning opening 35 is entered during the small hitting game. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the number of balls to be held during the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, the high-probability low base state, at least, until the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit determination (as long as the right-handed game continues, only the second special symbol hit determination), high-precision low base state As the game continues for a long time, the player can increase the number of balls he holds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain an average of about 20 prize balls (2 entrance balls) by the occurrence of one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (a large number of times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). Further, as a result, the total amount of balls to be won in the "Renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued can be increased to the amount of balls to win the small hit game in addition to the amount of balls to win the big hit game. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (only for big hits), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting opening 21 are for small hits ( It is said to be a big prize hole for small hits only. Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. It is possible to control the number (ratio) of game balls that reach the winning opening 35. Specifically, by the opening / closing control of the second starting opening 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the regular symbol judgment), when the small hit game is executed, the high base state ( The probability of a game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 is higher in the high accuracy low base state than in the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second special winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering a ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

  Further, by this, even in the same right-handed game, while holding the game ball into the second starting opening 21 and substantially maintaining the ball (including slight increase or slight decrease) (or suppressing the speed of the ball decrease) While,) expecting that the result of the second special symbol hit determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) and a state of playing a game (high base state), and a small game ball entering the second starting opening 21. When a hit occurs, the player can enter the second special winning opening 35 to increase the number of balls he holds and play the game with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and has a variety of playability. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that, for the player, a gaming state in which the highly accurate low base state capable of increasing the number of balls held can be more advantageous than the high base state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-precision high base state, in the high-precision high base state, the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) When the big hit does not occur until the display ends, the game state is supposed to change to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is set to a high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is a low-probability-high base state or a high-probability-high base state in the effect symbol display section or the like. The game effect is executed in such a display mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the jackpot game is not in the high-accuracy low base state but in the high-precision low base state, after that, it is changed to the high-accuracy low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to expect and play a game. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game for a long time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are "2R fifth big hit" and "2R sixth big hit" as types of big hits that shift from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state. "2R 5th big hit", transition from high-precision high base state to high-precision low base state after 50 times of variable display of special symbols, "2R 6th big hit", 100 times variable display of special symbols After passing, the high-accuracy high base state is changed to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, "2R seventh big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" are provided as the highly accurate low base state. "2R 7th big hit", after 50 times of variable display of special symbols, transition from low-probability high base state to low-probability low base state (normal state), "2R 8th big jackpot" is 100 times special When the variable display of the symbols is passed, the low accurate high base state is changed to the low accurate low base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the big hit game and the big hit after the big hit game according to the four big hit types of "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit". By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is. That is, it is set as a non-notification state in which the gaming state is not notified.

  In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio (occurrence rate) of these “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” in the non-notification state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-alarm state) continues even after the lapse of time, there is a higher possibility that the high base state will transition to the high-accuracy low base state at 100 times than when the high base state ends at 50 times. It is supposed to do. As a result, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times, and when the high-base state continues without transitioning to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times ( Even in the case where the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the highly accurate low base state. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the entertainment of the game for a long time.

  Note that, instead of such an aspect, even if the transition is made 50 times or 100 times, the possibility of transitioning to the highly accurate low base state is set to be the same. On the contrary, the possibility of transitioning to the highly accurate low base state may be higher in the case of transition after 50 times than in the case of transition after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the highly accurate low base state will be reduced. In addition, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the variable display of the special symbol for the first predetermined number of times has passed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy low-base state (unless you hit the jackpot by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of times the variable display of the special symbols has passed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times (if it is a big hit by then It may be decided not to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state (unless). In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying a character or a character that makes it easy for the player to recognize the game state (executes a finalized effect). You may report a state.

  Also, in the high-accuracy low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if the big hit, and if it is out, the result of the second special symbol hit determination in the high base state described above It is the same as when it is a big hit and when it is out.

  Further, the start gate 29 is also provided in the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed to the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing and the jackpot game is started without being blocked by the second starting opening 21 and the like from passing through to the start gate 29. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30, the second It is required to be provided upstream of the starting opening 21 and the second special winning opening 35.

  Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game area should be fired. Also, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to inform that the left-handed game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LED according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit), it is possible to inform that the left game area should be launched. it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area is to be shot as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z z" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed is "low accurate low base state", "high accurate low base state", " It is possible to control to either "low accurate high base state" or "high accurate high base state". Among them, the low accurate low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high accurate low base state is Also referred to as "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Moreover, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". Sometimes called "2" or "2nd special map".

  Next to initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is updated by adding 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, until the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the updating process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. To be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output processing (S201), the commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each processing described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The commands and the like output here include the game state, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the symbol as the jackpot type, the information regarding the variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting opening sensor 20a, second starting opening sensor 21a, first big winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The detection signals detected by 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving plate 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Then, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the completion of the interrupt process (S105), It is performed both during the period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers have randomness.

  Normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), then start mouth sensor detection process (S204), starting ball entry process (S205), ordinary figure operation process (S206), special figure 1 operation process (S207) ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power interruption monitoring processing (S210). After that, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting sensor detection process]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then, the number of ordinary symbol holding balls (the number of ordinary figure holdings, specifically, the number of holdings of ordinary figures provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  When it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol holding balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbol holding balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number obtaining process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol correctness determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S305). When it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, in S305, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main controller 80) It is determined whether the number of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special map 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special information). (Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the number of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, if it is determined in S310 that the number of special sphere 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311) to relate to special figure 2 A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 relational random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 relational random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol winning / disagreeing counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determining random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding sphere number in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b.

[Processing when starting the ball]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 carries out a starting entrance time detection process (S205) after the starting mouth sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entering process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 number of reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, of the read random number values, the value of the random number counter for special symbol hit / miss determination (random number value for special symbol hit / miss determination) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state) Whether or not it is out (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary judgment). The determination in S317 (preliminary determination) is a prior determination (a so-called "holding prefetching") in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (a determination as to whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is determined. )).

  It should be noted that the pre-judgment whether or not a big hit is a big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, a big hit judgment table for a high probability state in a high probability state, and a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) are used as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information. And the variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of the random number counter for determination of special symbols) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed.

  Next, in S318, game information related to the result of the determination in S317 (preliminary determination information), specifically, information indicating whether or not the special symbol validity determination random number value and the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (random number for big hit type determination), information indicating whether or not the special symbol right / wrong random number value matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), Command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the like is generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). Incidentally, as the special figure 2 start ball entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned variation pattern information) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information about a big hit, what kind of big hit type, and information about a small hit. The sub control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is any. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, by analyzing the Toku-zu 2 start ball entry command, whether or not the obtained Toku-zu 2 acquisition random number is a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and a low It is possible to specify whether or not to be a big hit when judging by the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start-up ball input command as hold (effect holding information), predetermines the effect holding information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the result is low probability. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect holding information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for special symbol validity determination out of the acquired random number value read in S316 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, but the value of the other random number counter for determining jackpot type (big hit Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and the information indicating the result of the pre-determination is generated as the special figure 2 starting admission command, and Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" as in the case of the above-described special diagram 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 holding ball number in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processes of S321 to S323 are the same as those of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The pre-determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 success / failure determination processing described later.

[Public motion processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and the "universal figure action status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. . When the "universal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "universal figure operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S, YES in S403), the normal symbol changing process (S404) is performed, and if the "general pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed If the "universal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric auditor processing (S407) is performed. The general operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process To finish. On the other hand, in S501, when it is determined that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol winning / discarding determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is usually 1 second. Select a pattern variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern in which the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process described below is performed (S504), then the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started in the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol variation start processing, in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the variation start of the ordinary symbol, a normal symbol variation start command is set.

[Normal symbol judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol appropriateness determination processing (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number counter stored in the universal symbol holding storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game state is a high base state (a low-probability-high base state or a high-probability-high base state) (S602). In S602, if the state B flag is ON, that is, if it is determined to be in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C) It is determined whether or not there is a hit by the high probability universal figure hit determination based on the values “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, in S602, the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the low base state (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not there is a hit by the low-probability universal figure hit determination based on the table for use (hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general / universal figure hit determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the stop display is out. The normal pattern (outside the normal pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S605 that the hit (general figure hit) is determined (YES in S605), the hit normal symbol to be stopped and displayed (general figure hit symbol) is determined (S607), and the hit figure flag is turned on (S608 ), Processing is completed.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504), first, the normal symbol holding sphere number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each universal figure reservation in the universal figure reservation storage unit is shifted one from the current position to the side to be read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the universal figure pending storage section, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the universal figure pending storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Processing is completed. In this way, the universal figure reservation is digested in the order of reservation.

[Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variable display of the normal symbol is changed, Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit ordinary symbol or out-of-ordinary symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol determination (S804), the process is ended.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the universal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined that the state B flag is ON in S902 (YES in S902), the opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is set as the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (the second starting opening 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the variable winning device 22 (the second starting opening 21) is opened as the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second opening opening counter. In S904, the universal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the universal figure end flag is ON (S1001). The universal figure hit end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second starting opening 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the universal figure end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003), and the open time is not reached. If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is the opening timing of the second starting port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting opening 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting opening 21 (that is, after opening the second starting opening 21 in advance. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed) (S1005), and when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second starting opening (NO in S1005), the process ends. When it is determined in S1005 that it is the closing timing of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing the second starting port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, when it is determined that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the universal figure ending process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the universal figure ending flag is set ( (S1010), the process ends. The second starting opening opening counter becomes “0” when the second starting opening 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state), and the state A Also during the state C (low base state), if the second starting opening 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the universal figure end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. , The universal figure hit end flag is turned off (S1011), the universal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal pattern operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) after the normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process relating to the special symbol display portion 41 and the special winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, “Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" Is (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S1104) is performed, and if "special map 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed, and if "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game When the accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” by default. Also, since the small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors product processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors product processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of holding balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special map 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entrance into the first starting opening 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special map 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process is ended. On the other hand, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (the demo screen for waiting for a customer is being executed). It is determined whether or not (S1208), and when it is determined that the standby screen is being displayed (YES in S1208), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

  In addition, in S1201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is not “0”, that is, there is at least one memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (in S1201 NO), the special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1203), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing" means that special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special figure 1 Pass / Fail judgment process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be described. In the special figure 1 hit / disapproval determination processing (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure pending storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure pending first block). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol validity determination random number counter (the oldest stored memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the hit determination of the other special symbol, it is not judged whether it is a big hit, a small hit or It is regarded as one of the outliers (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit determination to be executed during that period, Everything is out. In S1602, the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not performing fluctuation display related to big hits (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not there is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability state is low (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The win / no-judgment is performed based on the table (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the winning / judging determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is a "big hit" (S1606), and when it is determined as a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (label-TRND- AS) is read, the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1609). Figure 1 The big hit variation flag is turned on (S1610), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of the hit determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 4R first big hit, and the 4R second big hit is executed. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit by the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2), 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R Any of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a deviation symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit variation flag, a first big hit variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a variation display relating to the big hit (variable display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). And, the second special symbol has a second big hit variation flag indicating that the variation display related to the big hit (variable display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed, and the main control unit 80. The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. Further, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to the small hit (variable display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set. Then, for one special symbol, if the big hit variation flag is set (that is, during the variation display related to the big hit), in the other special symbol hit determination, the process of determining whether or not a big hit Not performed. That is, control such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special symbol 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the state A (whether or not the low-probability low base state) (S1701). When it is determined in S1701 that the state is state A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON. If determined (YES in S1702), referring to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) The variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different fluctuation time lengths is selected according to the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of retained balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first holding number deviation table (state A and deviation and holding number in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The portion corresponding to 1 and 2) is referred to and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holdings is 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second holding number deviation table (Fig. In the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A, the deviation, and the numbers 3 and 4 to be held.

  As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". The variation pattern is more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

  Further, in S1701, when it is determined that the game state is not state A (low accurate low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the game state is state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( (YES in S1709), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9), change based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). When it is determined in S1709 that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the portion corresponding to status B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Further, in S1708, if the game state is not state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), that is, if the game state is state C (high accurate low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the Toku-zu 1 jackpot variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C deviation table (the portion corresponding to state C and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  Incidentally, in the state B and the state C, since the game state in which the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Fluctuating display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simple (the types are small and the variation time is short). In the state B, the variation pattern P15 is set for a big hit, and the variation pattern P16 is set for a big hit. Further, in the state C, the variation pattern P23 is set for a big hit, and the variation pattern P24 is set for a large hit.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. Incidentally, in the other processing (S1704), a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in the variation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), first, the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to the next lower level (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a includes an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) is executed, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), while setting the special figure 1 operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbol changes during state B (high base state) Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is in the low accurate high base state, the low accurate low base state (normal state) is entered, and if it is the high accurate high base state, the high accurate low base state (advantageous state) is entered.

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped by the result according to the determination result of the special symbol validity determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number. Is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) is displaying variation when the big hit game or the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed during the variation display of special figure 1. Of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is finished, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol is being executed, the hit determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

  The special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, if the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, in S2902, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON in S2909 (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned on (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is ended. As a result, the variable display of Toku-zu 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

  Further, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already suspended (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON or not. Is determined (S2905). In S2905, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game according to special figure 2 is finished, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of variable time).

  Here, in the present Example 1, as an interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which has a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit variation flag indicating that the big hit variation related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), the first The special figure 1 big hit flag which shows execution of the big hit game which relates to the special design is turned on (S2003), it moves to the processing of S2004. Thereby, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the variable display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the big hit game is started.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, from the opening of the special winning opening to the closing) is set to "4". (S2004), the big hit opening command is set to start the big hit game (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the processing is ended. In addition, at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed, a stop command is transmitted to the sub control board 90. By receiving the stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has ended. By this, the big hit standby state is set. Further, in S2001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the variation display related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment 1, as a big hit flag, the result of the hit determination relating to the first special symbol is a big hit and a special figure 1 big hit flag (“the first big hit” indicating that the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. Also called "flag"), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit determination relating to the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When the big hit game is executed, the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, the special determination 2 small hit flag (also referred to as "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / no hit judgment related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs of a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 4R first big hit, a display mode such as "2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights, Δ: lights off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) and the like, it will be simply described below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special symbol 1 operation process and the special symbol 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol hold and the digestion of the second special symbol hold ((“variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol”), “first special symbol right / wrong judgment and second special symbol” It is said that it is possible to execute the judgment of "whether it is true or not" in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the judgment of winning / discarding based on the ball entering the second starting opening (second special symbol judging whether or not) is based on the judgment of entering the ball into the first starting opening (first special symbol winning / discarding). It is more likely that the player will be a big hit with a large profit (the amount of profit that can be obtained is larger) than that of the judgment (FIG. 8 (B)).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process relating to the special symbol display section 41 and the special winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), special symbol 2 during variation process (S1154), if the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151, S1153, YES in S1155) ), Special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if "special diagram 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special map 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric character processing as a small hit game Perform 2 (S1109). The special figure 2 operation status is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108) is common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the big hit game and the first special symbol This is because the big hit game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is a process similar to the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 Pass / Fail judgment processing]
The special figure 2 hit / miss determination processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / miss determination processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) The stored random number counter value for special symbol validity determination (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, because it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit determination It is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is ended. The other processes are the same as those in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), the same flow (S1401 to S1420) as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 is performed. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) To select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In addition, in the state B and the state C, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol winning / absence determination). Therefore, in state B and state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is performed mainly on the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol winning / absence determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (there are few types and the time is short).

  In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed and this processing is ended. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in the variation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved sphere count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set to the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), while setting the special figure 2 operation status to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during fluctuation]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process relating to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is a big hit type (round counter setting process) or a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. Although the processing when it is determined to be ON is different, it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process, which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag which is turned on when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the big hit waiting state and passes the game ball to the start gate 29. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and becomes a big hit, the big hit start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game progresses (the round game starts). Here, after the big hit, if the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is kept in a big hit standby state capable of executing the big hit. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, or a telephone call. Then, after the break, the player can shoot a game ball at an arbitrary timing and let the game ball pass through the start gate 29 to advance the big hit game. Further, the big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) in the big hit game is all finished (the big hit game is finished).

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), it is then determined whether or not the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that the opening is not open. When (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, to reach the time to start the first round after passing through the start gate 29. Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening process is performed (S2107), and the process is ended. Thereby, the 1st special winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of big hit.

  When it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of winnings to the special winning opening in the round is the specified maximum number (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is time to close the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30), that is, the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in S2111, when it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round ending conditions is satisfied, a process for closing the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process is ended to start the next round.

  On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period is set. Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round is over, and then it is determined whether the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process ends.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not passed in the jackpot waiting state. In the case (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), and S2154 is set. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . In other words, during the execution of the big hit game, in order to control the low probability state and the low base state, the probability variation flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game).

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined that the state B flag is not ON in S2154 (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and when it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the big hit standby state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a probability variation jackpot (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are set as probability varying big hits, and in S2201, a big hit game. Determines whether any of these five types is applicable. Then, when it is determined that it is the probability variation jackpot that was finished this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether or not the termination jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). . In S2203, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the jackpot game is over, and the high accurate high base state is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and the high accurate high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is not the 2R sixth big hit, that is, the 4R first big hit, the 15R third big hit, or the 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. The process is finished as it is. As a result, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, when it is determined that it is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low-probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then the jackpot game that has ended is the 2R seventh jackpot. Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), "100" is set to the state B counter (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and the low accurate high base state is set. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state The B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is completed. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is finished, and the low certainty high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined to be related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special map 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special map 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is ended. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the second big winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether it is time to open the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between a plurality of opening operations has elapsed (S2303). . Regarding the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the small hit symbol has been confirmed and stopped, regardless of whether the small hit game has passed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in S2303, when it is determined that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304), and the processing. To finish. When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined opening after opening the special winning opening It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). When it is determined in S2307 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of entered balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process moves to the small hit end process of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. The value is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit open counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next open operation is started, and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the processing shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process to end the small hit game, set the ending command of the small hit (S2311), start the ending period of the small hit (S2312), set the small hit end flag (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a prescribed number of game balls have entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time for the small hit has passed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2315), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is ended. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. Incidentally, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is ended. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number process (S209) after the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved sphere number process (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the command of the number of reserved balls for transmitting the information on the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is ended.

[Power interruption monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) after the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is input (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2601, when it is determined that the power-off signal is input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a positive change, whether it is a winning game or not, some reserve balls, Data concerning the remaining number of fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter, loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic structure, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect which is not present in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And produce a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Based on the jackpot pattern (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high probability state is established when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied ( Benefits) will end.

  The process (game state setting process (S2121)) of giving this high-probability state (privilege) can also be referred to as "privilege giving means". Incidentally, the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and the stop display are performed, so that the same result determination result is shown. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol" can be replaced with "The effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counter, flag, status, buffer, timer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the content of the RAM is not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses and counter values are reset. It should be noted that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power-off monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, the data related to the performance control when the power is cut off such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after the power is restored from a power failure such as a power failure (when the power is restored), the performance control by the performance control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is restored to the state before the power failure.

  In S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the random number for effect determination, a random number for changing effect determination that determines the mode (fluctuation effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for predicting effect determination that determines the notice effect, and an effect symbol determination that determines the effect symbol There are random numbers. The method of updating the random number can be the same method as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be incremented by 2 instead of being incremented by 1. The random number for effect determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing is, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) for notifying that there is a start ball entry from the main control board 80 or a control signal (notifying start of variation from the main control board 80). A fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained random numbers for effect determination is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update processing (S4005) is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It is transmitted to the control board which is the corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Production symbol game production, special game production related to a winning game, etc.) is executed. The production control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Further, it becomes possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, audio output control from the speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the production control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). Then, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the processing is ended. . The reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed prior to the other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process of creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and drive data for driving the movable decoration member 14 (electric drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process of storing the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S4303), and the switch stored by the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number is executed (S4305).

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described using FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start-ball entry command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start-ball entry command is not received (NO in S4401). , S4403, and when it is determined that the start ball entry command is received (YES in S4401), effect holding information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed by various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination randomness) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4401. Numerical value, game information such as fluctuation pattern random number value), according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the start / end command transmission / reception (when command is generated) special symbol holding balls , Is stored in a predetermined effect holding information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, when the received starting ball entering command is the special figure 1 starting ball entering command corresponding to the number of reserved balls “4” in the special figure 1, the preliminary determination result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball entering command. Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in an area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect holding information stored in this manner is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect holding information storage area in the sub-control board 90 (effect holding information) is the special figure reservation storage section (first special figure reservation storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the stored content (acquired information) in the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also an “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the variation start command is received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process described later ( S4404) is performed and the process proceeds to S4405. When it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the effect design is stopped and displayed to make the fluctuation effect. Varying effect ending processing for ending is performed (S4406). In the fluctuating effect ending process (S4406), a fluctuating effect ending command for stopping and displaying the effect design 8 and ending the fluctuating effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set fluctuating effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect design 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is performed to end the variable effect (effect symbol game effect). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. The variable effect refers to various effects that are performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

  Succeedingly, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing a hit game (a big hit game, a small hit game), and specifically, a start of a big hit game (occurrence of a big hit). ) Opening command sent at the time of, a round start command sent at the start of the round, a round end command sent at the end of the round, an ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big winning opening in the round game The 1st big winning a prize entrance command which is transmitted on the basis of the entrance to 30 and the 2nd award winning entrance command which is transmitted on the basis of the entrance to the 2nd big prize entrance in the small hitting game etc corresponds. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). , Processing related to execution of effects (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the round start command, the command is issued. Set the round effect command that specifies the round effect according to the round specified in the sub output buffer, and if it is the ending command, the ending effect that specifies the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. Further, if the received command is a special winning opening ball entering command (first big winning opening entering ball command, second big winning opening entering ball command), a special winning opening specified based on the command (first big winning opening) The entrance effect command for designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When these various effect commands related to the hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the opening effect and the round to match the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as another process, a process based on a received command other than the above-described various commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) is performed (S4409).

[Variable production start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to obtain various effect determination random numbers such as a variable effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, and an effect pattern determination random number. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information that designates a variation pattern) that designates the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, in the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information that designates the current game state, and determination of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination The result and the symbol information for designating the jackpot type are included (see FIG. 8). Further, the variation pattern designation command, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect design game effect to start this time It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of effect symbols) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status "4". It corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. By referring to the current mode status, the current effect mode can be specified.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect mainly on the image display device 7, and when the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the mode of the effect design 8 (for example, a pattern design, a number design, etc.), the appearing characters, items, background images, or the like. To be different. In addition, the production design game production can also be executed in a mode according to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (notice production, reach production, etc.) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. Can be In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low accurate low base state is controlled, and the effect modes C and D are executed when the high accurate low base state is controlled, and the effect mode E. Is executed when the vehicle is controlled to the low accurate high base state and when it is controlled to the high accurate high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to know whether the current game state is the low-probability low base state or the high-probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, it is difficult to know whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the sub-control unit 90 mainly controls the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining a game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined change effect pattern determination table and notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the variation production pattern determination table is used when the big hit corresponding to the current production mode is made. The variation effect pattern determination table and the notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (Not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the fluctuation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501, and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the designated variation pattern is selected and set (( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 that is mainly displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect symbol game effect), or when the character effect performed using a specific character is performed (character effect pattern game effect), reach effect or character The case where no effect is executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, as the display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, all the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When a mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays (temporary stop display) with the symbols (the same effect symbol) that constitute the big hit mode. ), And in the state where the remaining one continues to display the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect design is stopped and displayed as a design (three same effect designs) that completes the big hit mode. Refers to the production. At this time, the game effect is executed by using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") is determined and set. As for the effect design 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect design game effect, the result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment is out, and in the case of reach out, there are three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". Among them, one production design is different from other production designs, and when there is no reach, three production designs 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" are at least one other production design. It is said that the design pattern is different

  Further, in S4506, the notice effect executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect that is executed. This notice production shows the possibility that the result of the production design game production being executed is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (before the production design is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) (during the display of the variation of the production design). Notification effect). In S4506, based on the preview effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the preview effect determination table set in S4504, a preview effect that matches the designated fluctuation pattern and the determined fluctuation effect pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variation effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( (S4507), the variable effect start process ends. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display device 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a. As a series of effects from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 to the end (stop), effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

  As for the variable display of the effect design 8, in principle, the symbols are vertically scrolled in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” ... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order) ( (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" again and the vertical scrolling is repeated. The manner of variable display of the effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to the vertical scrolling, for example, the scrolling display in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), the switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling can be used as the variable display mode. It is possible to provide the aspect as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

  Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses, but in the present embodiment, when the variation display is stopped It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) production symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), 8R (right symbol) stop order of each symbol (also called "stop order") is "left symbol" → Middle pattern → Right pattern "Stopping mode (also referred to as" first stop mode "), and (2) Stopping order of each symbol is" Left symbol → Right symbol → Middle symbol "(" (Also referred to as "second stop mode"), and (3) all stop times (stop timing) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop") (also referred to as "third stop mode") And, (4) the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and after that the middle symbol is supposed to be stopped (also referred to as a "fourth stop pattern"). These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). In addition, the stop order of the first stop symbol is also called "first stop symbol", the stop symbol of the second stop symbol is also called "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol is the third stop symbol. That is also referred to as "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol".

  Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed based on the fact that the winning symbol is “win”.

  The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is mainly (1) when the production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "out" or "big hit" When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on that, (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit” When the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit”, In a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped That.

  The 3rd stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop) is mainly in (1) production mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening fluctuation according to the special figure holding ball number works (when fluctuation starts). Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "out", and based on this, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is normally changed. , (2) When in the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is normally changed based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “small hit”. In the case (3) in the production modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being “out”, And (4) production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  Fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) is mainly in the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "out" or "big hit" This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed based on the reach change based on the stop of the variable display.

  In this way, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided according to the effect mode (game state) and the variable display mode based on the result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the game situation. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be subsequently displayed (derived display). It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, the possibility, etc., through the stopping mode. This allows the player to pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and fuels the expectation for the special game thereafter.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode in which the stop order of the three symbols forming the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol” (fifth stop mode) ), Or the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and after that the right symbol is to be stopped (sixth stop aspect), various stop aspects can be provided, and each stop is possible. The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to those in this embodiment, and can be set in various ways.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (production mode). Specifically, in the state A (production mode A, B), "7" of the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), other odd-numbered symbols "1", "3". , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also referred to as "pattern"). On the other hand, in states B and C (rendering modes C, D, and E), "3", "5", and "7" of the odd-numbered symbols are red symbols, and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "9". Is a green pattern, and even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue patterns.

  The correspondence relationship between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be adopted, and the type of color is not limited to the present embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than color. For example, the type of character when the character is attached to the effect design, and the number design when having the effect design (character design) that represents a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (number design) that represents a number and Depending on the character design, the design type may be determined, and further, the design type may be determined simply by the odd number design and the even number design.

  Variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, by the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect design 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (deriving display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), three perfect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers), that is, "completely separated eyes" (such as "124"), and the direct symbols. 8L (left symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, "Reach reach" ("343" etc.) ) Is a disengagement mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "Zoro eyes" ("777" etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all the same are used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the "reach rose" among the roses is also used for the 2R jackpot mode which triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R big hit game has a smaller number of award balls (the number of award balls) that the player can obtain compared to the 4R big hit game (4R big hit game, 15R big hit game) and the state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state) where it is more difficult to win a prize ball (increase the number of balls) in the small hit game compared to the exact low base state, that is, for the player This is because the special game has a relatively low degree of profit (profit amount). Further, the "completely broken eyes" among the broken eyes are also used as a small hitting mode which is a trigger for executing the small hitting game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the time as described above, so that the small winning big winning port (second winning port) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35) and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will bring a profit (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, the "specific break" to be described later among the breaks is a small hit mode that is a trigger for executing the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low base state). Here, the small-hit mode (particularly unbalanced pattern) is also referred to as the "first display mode", and the large-hit mode (double-sided pattern) is also referred to as the "second display mode". Of the eyes), the reach-cleared eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and of the out-of-order modes (completely-cleared eye and reach-bare eye), the completely-cleared eye is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Incidentally, the state A (low accurate low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, so that mainly the first special symbol win / fail judgment (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed. Yes, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit determination (variable display of the second special symbol) is rarely performed, so the second special symbol hit determination in such a situation When performed, the variable display of the effect design 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the variable display (and the stop display) by the effect display device 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, the state B (high base state) and the state C (high-probability low base state) are game states in which a right-handed game is basically performed, so mainly the second special symbol winning / judgment determination (second special state) Since the variable display of the symbol) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol validity determination (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and thus such a situation When the first special symbol hit determination is made below, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display by the effect display device 102 ( And stop display). However, if a special symbol hit determination against the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit determination in state C When a big hit is made), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating that the big hit has occurred. To do. Thereby, while the production display (variation production) of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the line is displayed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be displayed is a big hit. Further, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player loses the opportunity to obtain a profit by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, mainly based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect design game effect of the state A is performed under the situation where the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) in accordance with a predetermined mode control condition. . Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the effect mode in the state A.

  Further, in the state A, as the effect symbols 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols made of blue symbols and “1”, “3”, “5” made of green symbols, The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To be executed.

  Based on such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54A), the variable display is basically the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is stopped (see (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f) in Fig. 54), and the shortening fluctuation according to the number of special balls 1 reserved balls When the function works (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), the vehicle is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, if the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. The reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like until the stop. In the reach effect, mainly, the effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped by the same symbol as the symbol that is stopped first (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed) is developed. The same is true in the states B and C regarding the establishment of reach and the production of reach.

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, as a result of the variability display, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disparate pattern (complete disparity pattern or reach disparity pattern), it is “out”. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. But, it switches to the big hit game effect for 4R big hit concerning the 1st special design. When the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is the state C (high-accuracy low base state), and the "4R second big hit" is concerned. If so, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state B (low accurate high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[State B game play]
Next, the game effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the jackpot game based on the "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit" occurs in state C (high-accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect design game effect of the state B is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically set according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

  In the state B, as the effect symbols 8, "2", "4", "6", "8" symbols made of blue symbols, "1", "9" symbols made of green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", "7" consisting of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To be executed. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variable display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped by (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because in state B, the second special symbol time saving function and high base generating function are activated, so that out-of-reach fluctuations and small hit fluctuations can be digested in the shortest possible time and the game can proceed smoothly. This is because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop. There is no agitation for the people. On the other hand, if there are out-of-reach fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations with reach (that is, "reach fluctuations"), or "reach fluctuations" (a type of fluctuation without reach) that is actually normal fluctuations that actually appear to be reach fluctuations, is performed. When it is displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( See f)).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separation) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the state B in the state B in the state B is related to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", as the big hit game effect, the 15R No. Big hit game effect for 3 big hit or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is done. Then, the game state after the big hit game is finished is the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a high-precision high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, in the state B, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. It Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (displacement mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When the small hit in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect design game effect (here, the effect design. 8 is displayed in a completely discolored pattern), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the miss. Then, the game state after the end of the small hit game remains the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the game state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In the low-probability-high base state, which is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low-probability low base state) with the end (stop) of the change display (outside change) for the predetermined number of times, and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". To do. Also, in the case of the high-precision high-base state which is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit, The game state shifts to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) upon the end (stop) of the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display (outside fluctuation), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". .

[Game production in state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C, mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination, effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and a small hit occurs. It is an effect (small hit game effect). The state C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained between the big hits by frequently making the small hits until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed under the situation where the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) as in the case of the above-described states A and B, but in the present embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. It is possible for the player to select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Further, in the state C, as in the case of the state B, as the effect symbol 8, "2", "4", "6", "8" symbols made of blue symbols and "1", "9" made of green symbols. And the symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” composed of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is the same between the state B and the state C.

  Here, the contents of the game effect (specification of effect) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different between the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" in the state C. . Therefore, in the following, the game effect in each effect mode will be described by dividing into “effect mode C” and “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8 as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed so as to face each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of symbols is not performed. There are a plurality of types of characters in each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one of the ally characters (also referred to as "ally character") and one enemy character (also referred to as "enemy character") in the rendering mode C Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the teammate character attacks the enemy character or the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character. The effect (character effect) by such a character is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when accompanied by the variable display of the identification information) and when the result of the variable display is a small hit and the small hit game is executed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed with a special game after the end of the variable display).

  In addition, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right portion (first display portion) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of the present embodiment is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a five-digit number of “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. The prize ball count image C1 mainly indicates the number of prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls) that the player has acquired by a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state. In the case of becoming C, the number of prize balls to be acquired during that period (so-called, the number of prize balls to be acquired during the condominium period) is shown until the game state returns to the state A (except during the big hit game). .. In addition, since the state C (high-accuracy low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur (the frequency of executing small hit games becomes high), it is possible to obtain prize balls (increase the number of balls held) in small hit games. The prize ball count image C1 is displayed for the purpose of rendering. That is, as the small hit game effect, effect display (ball entry effect) by the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

  A basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 57. It should be noted that, in FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, part of the display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol), right-handing instruction image M, and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57A), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the out fluctuations without reach can be digested in the shortest possible time to allow the game to proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (inclination effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (Fig. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Also, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small hit", the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → It is stopped by the right pattern) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separation) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C relates to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", in this case, for the 15R third big hit Big hit game effect or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the big hit game is finished is the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace As the big hit game effect in this case, an effect display indicating the end of state C, that is, the end of the advantageous state where small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a high-precision high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  In addition, in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variation display of the production symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed as a normal variation. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a specific pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, two adjacent symbols of the three symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) is defined as a specific pattern (small hit mode). A symbol combination that constitutes a specific pattern (small hit mode) does not result in reach, but it is a symbol combination such that two adjacent symbols are the same symbol (number). Is also referred to as "reach sequence".

  Of the symbols (“3”, “5”, “7”) that make up the specific rose (first display mode), the symbols “3” and “5” make up the specific rose in the state A. Although it is a green design (first design type) that cannot be done, in the state C, it is a red design (second design type) that can form a specific pattern (see FIG. 53). In other words, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the game state. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the symbol type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol and draw the interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) that are the green symbols in the state A, and a specific unevenness (the first symbol) in the state C (first Although the display pattern) is a red pattern that can be configured, for example, a part of the effect design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) which is a blue pattern in the state A is a red pattern. Or, the effect design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue design in the state A and the effect design (“1”, “3”, “5” that is a green design) , "9") (eg, "4" and "5") may be used as red patterns. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific variation (first display mode) may be configured by the symbols belonging to this dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold design (gold design) is provided as a design type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect design which is the green design in the state A can be the gold design in the state C. This makes it possible to further emphasize the symbol types that can form a specific pattern and make it easier for the player's attention. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5" which are the green symbols (the first symbol type) in the state A are the red symbols (the second symbol type) in the state C, but in this case, In the state A, the red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning, the symbol “7” may be changed to the gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5" that are red symbols (second symbol type) are the symbols that can form a specific pattern, and the symbol "7" that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) Can be a 15R jackpot mode (“7” doublet) corresponding to the 15R third jackpot of the jackpots. By this, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific rose pattern (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold pattern) that configures a specific doublet pattern (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished, and hit. It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes (left symbol → It is assumed that the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the order of stop of the middle design → the right design). Therefore, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) but also the stopped mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode has caused the player to pay attention. Further, in the production mode C, in the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the variable display), an effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each pattern (red pattern) that constitutes the small hit mode, and the periphery of each pattern. It is assumed that an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating is displayed. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the display of the small hit mode (that the small hit game is executed) when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of. The form of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other forms can be adopted.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed by the display of the small hit mode, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C1 for each of the entered balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second special winning opening 35 is set to 10 prize balls per one ball, and therefore the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Further, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a along with the execution of the small hit game ( An effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, one of an ally character and an enemy character (for example, an ally character) performs an effect display (also referred to as “first effect”) in which the other (for example, an enemy character) attacks or sets a trick. I am trying. In this case, the character effect (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a later-described battle effect in which a confrontation scene of both characters is drawn. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the big winning opening for small hits (the second big winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect at this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hitting game having a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the relevant character effect and the character effect performed as a variable effect described later as related effects, and from the variable display. It is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) having a sense of unity between the teammate character and the enemy character in the small hit game. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 associated with the small hit is a sub command of the second prize hole entrance command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second prize hole sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, and the sub control unit 90 receives the opening command (S2066) for the small hit transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these are performed, all of these effects correspond to the small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of additionally displaying the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  In this way, in the production mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect design 8 and the display of the small hitting mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) occur at a high frequency, and accordingly, in the small hit game. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, by the cooperation of such effect design game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect, the occurrence of the small hit is strongly given to the player. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, the expectation for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls) due to frequent small hits can be fueled, and the enjoyment of the game in the effect mode C (state C) can be enhanced. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second big winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the character production is not performed. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35, It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, description will be made on the contents of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed in the effect mode C. As described above, in the production mode C, the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8 etc.) in the state where the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (a)). In addition, when the reach variation (out or big hit) is performed, and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under these circumstances, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation, then the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) first stops according to the second stop mode. However (see FIG. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) is stopped, a performance display depicting a scene in which one of an ally character and an enemy character displayed in the background mounts an attack on the opponent (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by the character (allied character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped. This first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (" (Also referred to as “first effect pattern B”), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be set, success or failure of the attack, and the like. By providing such plural kinds of patterns, the suggestion of the information (the big hit reliability, the contents of the effect that can be executed later, etc.) about the current variation display (the variation) by the effect content when the first effect is performed. (Preliminary notice). The first effect is an effect that one of the ally character and the enemy character ends the attack by attacking the other, and does not include the battle effect described below.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which an ally character mounts an attack), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variable display. That is, it means that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state where small hits frequently occur, does not occur. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), whether the reach is achieved and developed to reach production, but finally the middle symbol stops at a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production symbol 8 is displayed in reach reach (outside mode) (Out-of-reach variation), or through the reach effect, the effect design 8 is displayed with a doublet (big hit mode) (big hit change). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (a pattern in which the enemy character mounts an attack), which is the opposite of the first effect pattern, the 2R big hit mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the variable display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), but reach reached and developed to reach production, but finally the middle pattern stops with a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production design 8 is reach reach (outside mode or 2R big hit mode) It is displayed (out-of-reach variation or 2R big hit variation), or the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit variation) after the reach effect (big hit variation). In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not the reach is established, whether or not it is advantageous for the player) It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player for the subsequent development than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns by the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided whether to do it.

  After the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. When the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is stopped and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (outside mode). In this case, the fluctuation is out-of-reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol stopped following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the change is a reach change (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect, after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect), the effect by the character (allied character, enemy character) that is performed while the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still changing ( In the present embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character that have been displayed as the background. The second effect (battle effect) is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also referred to as "second effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an ally character loses the confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as "second effect pattern B") and a pattern (also referred to as "second effect pattern C") that ends a battle (battle) without winning or losing. There are a plurality of patterns that define the type of character, which of the ally character and the enemy character will attack first (the type of character that makes the first strike), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (big hit reliability etc.) relating to the present variation display (the variation) by the content of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. There is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), of the second effect patterns (also referred to as “second effect patterns”), the ally character makes a preemptive attack on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). There is a pattern in which an enemy character first wins and the ally character eventually wins. Further, in the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the allied character is defeated. Further, in the second effect pattern C (a winning / losing undecided pattern), a pattern in which an ally character makes a first strike but the enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character withstands the attack There is. The second effect (battle effect) based on these second effect patterns all starts with the preemptive attack of the ally character or the enemy character, and the effect content (confrontation result) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scene, etc.) is predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above, the second effect (battle) can be performed in any of a plurality of types of patterns. Whether to execute) is decided.

  In this embodiment, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit), that is, the change When the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derived display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). Production) is performed. In this case, after the variable display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed, and the game state becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) again after the big hit game. Therefore, the player can play the game in an advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur after the big hit game. Since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game in this way, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the teammate character wins.

  Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a deviation variation (reach deviation variation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being out of alignment, that is, the effect symbol 8 is a reach variation as a result of the variation display. When it is displayed with eyes (disappearance mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (undecided pattern) is performed before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C will be continued after the variable display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed). Since the game continues in the state C in this way, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is finished without a winning or losing decision.

  Furthermore, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation When the effect design 8 is displayed as reach reachable eyes (2R big hit mode) as a result of the display, the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) before the 2R big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R big hit game is performed after the variable display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is ended with the occurrence of the 2R big hit. In this way, the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, so that the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated.

  Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the content that the ally character makes a preemptive attack are the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) and the second effect pattern C (undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is preempted by the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred that there is at least no possibility of a 2R jackpot at this point, that is, a possibility of ending state C. On the other hand, the pattern including the content of the first attack by the enemy character corresponds to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)). Therefore, for the player, the reach on the display screen 7a is reached. If the battle production (second production) is started after the formation, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts from the preemptive attack of the enemy character, the possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C is possible at that time) Sex) cannot be excluded. Then, after the enemy character's preemptive attack, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect is finished, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, so the fluctuation is the 2R jackpot. This is a change, and as a result, the game in state C is over. On the other hand, after the enemy character's preemptive attack, if the ally character finally wins and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The change is a big hit change of 15R or 4R, and when the teammate dodges the enemy character's preemptive attack to end the battle production, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. As described above, in the reach variation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the variable effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is smaller in size (reduced size) than the other effect modes such as the effect mode C on the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (also referred to as “reduced display”), and the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In the production mode D that adopts such a screen configuration, usually, while the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the upper right of the screen, the production display mainly showing how the fighter is flying is developed on the display screen 7a. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach variation is performed, the effect design 8 is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is displayed on the entire display screen after the reach is established. It is possible to use it. In the present embodiment, the main image X that imitates a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this as the main effect image may also be displayed. It is possible. Further, also in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right hitting instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

  A basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that, also in FIG. 58, for convenience of explanation, part of the display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol) is omitted. First, in the rendering mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is normally displayed. This moving image is displayed even when variable display of symbols is not being performed. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variable display is basically the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of a normal change (off or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The reason for stopping in the third stop mode is the same as in the effect mode C described above. In the production mode D, the mode of the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed at the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach variation (out or big hit) or the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is hidden and the effect design 8 that is displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen is displayed. It is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left design → right design → middle design) or the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle design) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). Incidentally, when the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed in the substantial center of the display screen 7a. At the timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped at substantially the same time, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scroll display).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separation) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, and 2R big hit game can be executed when displayed in the 2R big hit mode (Reach reach). Becomes The effect during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, in the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Then, it is normally changed and stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58 (b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variable display associated with the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect design 8 is mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect symbol 8 in the specific upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific variation (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit due to the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is proper. Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous manner, at that time, an effect image different from the effect pattern 8 can be displayed, and the occurrence of a small hit may be suggested (notice) to the player by the display of the effect image. I am supposed to.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit variation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second special winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 2 per one small hit game. Since three game balls are designed (gauge configuration) to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35, three target images Y are displayed corresponding to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect), and the variable effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in S4505 described above (small for effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed in executing the variation effect. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can be said to be a notice effect image that gives a notice of the occurrence of a small hit. The display of the target image Y may be included in the notice effect pattern set in S4506, instead of being included in the change effect pattern.

  Then, when the small hit variation (variable display of the effect design 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize to be opened in the small hit game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as "destruction effect") showing a state in which the target image Y is destroyed for each entry (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed. The destruction effect is performed based on that the sub-control unit 90 receives the second special winning opening ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second special winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect represents that the target image Y is destroyed by the missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the entrance into the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of such a small hit variation to the small hit game is the basic effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. It is assumed that an effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called "hold ahead read effect" is performed. The holding prefetching effect (also referred to as "small hitting prefetching effect") relating to this small hit is realized by the small hitting prefetching effect processing (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetch production process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 when starting the variable display (variation production) of the production symbol 8 in the production mode D. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C), and the specific period flag is specified. During the period, a special effect will be given to the small hit. When it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this process is terminated without performing the processes of S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), as a hold of the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol hold), the second special symbol hit or not It is determined whether or not a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") in which the determination result is a small hit is stored (S5002). This determination is performed by referring to the effect holding information (preliminary determination result or the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the stored content of the effect holding information storage area (acquired information storage unit) of the sub-control board 90. The presence / absence of a small hit hold is determined, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the variable display (also referred to as “the relevant change”) of the effect design 8 to be started (S5002). Note that holding a small hit is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), this processing is terminated without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. When it is determined that it is (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not a small hit occurs continuously 3 times or more as a result of the variation display including the variation (variation display to be started from now) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the variation (S5003). This determination can also be made by referring to the effect holding information (stored contents of the effect holding information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings have not been stored in succession (NO in S5003), this process ends without performing the processes in S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by displaying a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (announcement of the change) that suggests the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings are stored consecutively (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start the specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect related to the small hit. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is continuously played three times or more, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of three or more continuous variable displays. If (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a lottery for starting a specific period (a type of random number lottery for determining production) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. If it is won (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 when starting the specific period is supposed to be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) that three or more small hit holdings are stored in succession are stored and (2) that the winning lottery for the specific period is won, the specific period is satisfied. Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the conditions for starting the specific period.

  When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hits pending determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display (small hit variation) is stopped (ended) thereafter. Further, the specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is during the specific period, and is mainly used at the start of the variation effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) and when the second special figure suspension occurs (special figure 2 start incoming ball command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to when the effect holding information is stored (S4402). The specific period flag is turned on in S5006 and then turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

  In this embodiment, three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored (YES in S5003), and when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether to set the small hit prefetching effect pattern B and set the effect pattern B in the case of a positive determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetching effect is executed and a case where the small hitting prefetching effect is not executed when three or more small hitting reservations are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit pre-reading effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit pre-reading effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect pattern game effect is given to the image control board 100. The small hit prefetching effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (the first small hit change). , The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is hidden, and the characters “Continuous GET Shiro !!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  Then, with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T (which displays the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of won prize balls during the specific period. The second display portion) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed by the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for the one entered ball The prize ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61C), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is It is additionally displayed on the prize ball count image C2 (the number of won prize balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). Also, during the specific period, not only in the second big winning opening 35, when a game ball enters the third starting opening 26, a prize ball to be paid out for each incoming ball (for each one entered) The award ball number image S indicating the number (one in the present embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the award ball number image indicated by the award ball number image S indicates the award ball count image. It is additionally displayed on C2 (the number of winning prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, during the specific period, the award ball number image S and the award ball count image C2 are easily displayed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of these ball entry effects. The effect of additionally displaying the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the award ball number image S and the addition display of the award ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game sphere by the third starting opening sensor 26a and the second special winning opening sensor 35a. This is performed based on that the sub-control unit 90 receives a ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning opening ball entry command) (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 can occur during a game other than the small hit game, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition of the prize ball counting image C2 based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The display can also be executed as an effect during variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. Further, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the lower right portion of the screen (first display portion) is not performed. This shows the number of prize balls acquired during a specific period (during the period of small hit condominiums) in which the small hit game is continuously performed three or more times, in distinction from the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game when the specific period is not reached. This is because.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hit holdings in the present embodiment). ) Is carried out until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit variation corresponding to all the small hit holdings and the small hit game are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed until then is erased from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of acquired prize balls shown by the prize ball count image C2 is at the lower right of the screen (first display portion). The effect display that is added to (added to) the number of won prize balls shown by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in is displayed (see (e) to (f) in FIG. 61). According to the effect based on such a small hit prefetching effect pattern A, the effect form (first profit effect, second profit effect) is changed by changing the display mode of the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount). It is possible to enhance the effect. The mode of effect display based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the number of prize balls image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is displayed horizontally in the vicinity of the upper left part on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. It is possible to adopt various display modes, such as

  On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is performed, along with the start of the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8, A plurality of the above-mentioned target images Y (see FIG. 59 (a)) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning a prize in the small hit game of the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (3 or 4) stored at the time when the variable display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59 (a)), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, 9 or 12 target images Y are displayed. That is, the number of display of the target image Y (effect mode of the predetermined effect) varies depending on the number of stored small hits. Due to the display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display continuously performed a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display becomes a small hit (specific display result). It is possible to suggest to the player that the consecutive hits). After this, each time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 while the small hit game is played for the number of times corresponding to the small hit holding number at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B. The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the stored number of small hits held is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second special winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed while the effect of updating based on the effect and the small hit variation based on the small hit hold are performed, and the display mode (the movement of the character, etc.) of the character image is directed to the second special winning opening 35. It is possible to make various effects such as effects that change based on the entering of the ball as the predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of predetermined effects) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56 (b)), a small hit frequently occurs, so that the player enters the second special winning opening 35. Since effects based on (first profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed at high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect related to the small hit and improve the interest of the game. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hitting reservations (“3” or more in the present embodiment), when the specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit prefetching effect, Until the small hits are all exhausted and the specific period ends, the award ball number image S and the award ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect). Therefore, the award ball number image S is displayed. It is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of won prize balls (the number of won prize balls during the particular period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is originally displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display portion). It is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls of the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit holdings (“3” or more in the present embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hit prefetch effect. The effect (small hit prefetching effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) varies depending on the number of small hits held. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect produced by the effects (small hit prefetch effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.) that are executed in association with the small hit, and to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, description will be made on the contents of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed in the effect mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect design 8 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the effect design game effect (of the effect pattern 8) is displayed. (Variable display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56B and 58A). In addition, when the reach variation (outside or big hit) is performed and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is hidden after the variation display of the effect design 8 is started, and is displayed on the upper right of the screen until then. The effect symbol 8 that was being displayed is largely displayed in the approximate center of the screen and is displayed in a vertical scrolling manner. After that, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth. Stop in the stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and thereafter). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), the reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined result is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect executed in the effect mode D (also referred to as “third effect”) is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above, in which the ally character and the enemy character are combined. It is a battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene (confrontation effect), and is provided with a plurality of third effect patterns having different contents of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly divided into a pattern in which the teammate character wins (also referred to as "third effect pattern A") and an ally. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as "third effect pattern B") and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without winning or losing (also referred to as "third effect pattern C"). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character that makes a preemptive attack, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) is also referred to as a "first variation effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (ally loss pattern) is also referred to as a "second variation effect pattern". The effect pattern C (a winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, in the third effect (battle effect) pattern, a pattern with a strong attack power (for example, the type of weapon used for attacking, the type of technique, etc.) of each ally character and enemy character A strong pattern) and a pattern with a weak attack power (also called a "weak pattern") are provided. In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which an ally character attacks an enemy character, a strong pattern (also called “ally strong pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to a weak pattern (also called “ally weak pattern”). It is supposed to show that it is highly effective. Further, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, the strong pattern (also called “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than the weak pattern (also called “enemy weak pattern”). It is meant to indicate that. These strong and weak patterns enable the player to be informed of the development and results of the battle production.

  Further, when the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation is performed in the production mode D, an image (also referred to as a “preliminary image”) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach production in the variation. Is displayed (see FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is one type of notice effect (preliminary notice pattern) set in S4506 described above in accordance with the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in S4505 described above, and a notice set in advance is provided. When the notice effect (the notice effect pattern for the effect mode D) by the display of the notice image is selected (set) based on the effect determination table (not shown), a predetermined execution is performed for the change display (change effect). Notice image is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established. This timing is also set in accordance with the form of the notice production (the notice production pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image due to the reach out-of-range variation is determined from the start of the variation display until it is determined that the reach is not established (reach not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). . This is because the reach cannot be established by the out-of-reach fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the notice image due to the reach out-of-range variation is the start time of the variation display. By displaying the notice image, the player can infer the development of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation. The display of the notice image may not be based on the notice effect pattern, but may be included in the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above. Further, the notice image can be said to be “information regarding the game after the end of the variable display”, and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when displaying a notice image, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower part of the display screen 7a is set as a notice image display area U, and the notice image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stopped by the reach establishment are respectively displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, and the reach effect is mainly in the center of the screen. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a notice image that can be displayed in the notice image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first notice image for giving notice (indication) of occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and an notice (suggestion) of a transition to the effect mode E (state B). It has three types of advance notice images including a third advance notice image 503 (third information). At the start of displaying the preview image (start of information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding the subsequent game development, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are contents based on the game in the effect mode D (state C) as a reference (base), the display of such notice images causes effect mode D (state C). ) Will give a notice (indication) of the subsequent game development based on the game in (), and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode D (state C). Note that the form (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the notice image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65, and for example, the horizontally long notice image display area U shown in FIG. Or the vertically long notice image display area U is provided at the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are vertically (vertically) provided in the notice image display area U. It is possible to adopt various aspects such as displaying them side by side.

  The first notice image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second notice image 502 is configured to include the character “continuation”, and the third notice image 503 is configured to include the character “mode E”. To be done. In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, two types of notice images are displayed. As a display pattern (a notice image combination), that is, a notice effect pattern, the "first notice image 501" shown in FIG. And a second display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502" and a second display pattern for displaying "the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503" shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying the "first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, three types of notice images are provided. However, for example, when the 15R third jackpot and the 4R fourth jackpot are separately (discriminately) given, or there are more types of jackpots. More types of advance notice images may be provided, such as providing advance notice images according to the type of jackpot. Also in this case, at least two types of notice images may be displayed in the notice image display area U, and the display pattern of the notice image (notice effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is to be displayed is determined by the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when the reach out-of-range variation is performed (reach out-of-range variation effect pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 from the start of the variation. The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is due to the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). It is performed until the reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the start of the display of the notice image (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the notice image displayed until then is erased from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect design 8 is terminated (stopped) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern in the case of displaying the notice image is performed by setting the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, which is referred to when setting the notice effect by the display of the notice image in S4506, It is supposed to be performed based on the display pattern determining random number which takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the respective selection rates of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach out-of-range fluctuation, both the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern and the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern can be executed. The latter has a higher possibility of execution (the selection rate of the first display pattern is “30%”, the selection rate of the second display pattern is “70%”).

  On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is a big hit variation based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). If, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a doublet pattern (big hit mode) (big hit fluctuation effect pattern), before the big hit mode is displayed (before derivation display), the third effect. The third effect (variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. After the variation display is stopped (after the big-hit mode is displayed), the big-hit game is played, and after that, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (first variable effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which an ally character wins. In the variation (big hit variation), a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, for example, when the variation starts or when the reach is established. Is started. In this case, the advance notice image can be displayed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is a possibility that the game in state C will end (a possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player has a 2R big hit at that time. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that the subsequent game development may be disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect that is a ally victory) is executed based on the third effect pattern A due to the big hit variation is displayed first rather than the second display pattern. The display pattern is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern is larger than the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) at which the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “ally strong pattern” due to a big hit change, the possibility of displaying the notice image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

  Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “ally strong pattern” and the display of the notice image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time (for example, a ally character and an enemy) after the display of the notice image is started. Assuming that the first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the notice image display area U at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of the character's showdown or during the showdown. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlarged display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the notice image is displayed. Done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than at the beginning of display, or is erased (erased in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the ally strong pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the variation (battle effect). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and security of the player by suggesting to the player that the value is high. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased, the display may be used to give notice of confirmation of the big hit (big hit confirmation notification). In addition, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged, the second notice image 502 is deleted, and the like. The display mode of the notice image being displayed on U may be changed stepwise. In addition, as a change in the display mode of the notice image, for example, the "big hit" character of the first notice image 501 may be changed to "super big hit" that suggests the 15R big hit, or the "big hit" character and its background color may be changed. It is also possible to change the characters, colors, shapes, etc., that make up the advance notice image, such as by changing the color. Further, such a change in characters and the like and a change in display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of this embodiment may be combined to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “ally strong pattern”, that is, a “ally weak pattern”, an “enemy strong pattern”, or an “enemy weak pattern” In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. Even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “ally strong pattern”, it is possible to display the first notice image 501 in an enlarged manner. In this case, the “ally strong pattern” is used. The feasibility of enlarged display (change of display mode) may be made lower than that of. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the advance notice image.

  Further, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), when the variation is performed as an outlier variation (reach outlier variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / disapproving determination being out, , When the effect design 8 is displayed as reach variation (displacement mode) as a result of the variable display (reach deviation variation effect pattern), before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win or lose) The third effect (variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the third production pattern C (third variation production pattern) is a battle (battle) without winning or losing. It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the variation (out-of-reach variation), for example, at the start of the variation or when the reach is established, at the predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, the first notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 are displayed. The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the notice image is displayed according to the first display pattern, the player is unlikely to have at least a 2R jackpot as a result of the change (battle effect) (end possibility of state C). Can be guessed. On the other hand, when the notice image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player is likely to have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). You can guess that there isn't. In the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect of undecided battle) based on the third effect pattern C is executed by the out-of-reach variation is displayed as the first display pattern and the second display. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the practicability is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, so the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player any anxiety that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the notice image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that a 2R big hit will occur, and it becomes impossible to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, such anxiety is given to the player. The display of the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a reach-out variation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, a predetermined time during a match between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the match). , Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are erased (display mode of the notice image changes). As a result, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) does not occur as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect) and is out, and the game in the state C is continued. You can In this way, the display of the preview image that only the second preview image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  In the out-of-reach variation, the big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display (a big hit is not generated). Therefore, the first notice image as described above is displayed in the notice image according to the first display pattern. The enlarged display of 501 is not performed. In addition, in the out-of-reach variation, after displaying the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the second notice image 502 of the notice images may be enlarged and displayed. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for giving a notice (indication) of the continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not give the player the benefit of the big hit occurrence. Since a notification (indication) that the possibility of continuation of the state C is high is given, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  Further, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on that the result of the second special symbol winning / deciding determination is 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hit). When it is performed as a 2R jackpot variation, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed as reach reachable (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern) as a result of the variation display (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern), before the 2R jackpot variation display (before derivation display) ), The third effect based on the third effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) is performed. In addition, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the 2R big hit game is played, the game state after the big hit game is the state B (high base state), and the game in the state C is continued. Since it is no longer possible, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated. In the variation (2R jackpot variation), the second notice image 502 and the second notice image 502 and the second notice image 502 are displayed at a predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as when the variation starts or when the reach is established. 3 The display of the notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the notice image in the case where the third effect (battle effect of ally defeat) based on the third effect pattern B is executed in the 2R jackpot variation is not executed in the first display pattern, It is assumed that this is executed only by the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is, even though the notice image is displayed according to the first display pattern (the notice effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development), the game in the state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative This is because the game development is disadvantageous to the player). By doing this, the player can feel a sense of discomfort and distrust when displaying the notice image and the third effect (battle effect), and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect). It becomes possible not to have a feeling.

  After that, the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a competition between the ally character and the enemy character or at a completion time of the competition). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change in display mode of notice image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big hits (any of the 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has come to an end. it can. In this way, the display of the final notice image in which only the third preliminary notice image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preliminary notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the production mode D, when a reach variation or an out-of-reach variation is performed, based on the variation production pattern related to the variation, the contents (game development) of the game that can be executed after the variation are announced (implied). The notice image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U). In this notice image, a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that triggers the setting of state C (high-accuracy low base state). And, a second notice image 502 (second information) for announcing (suggesting) the continuation of state C, and announcing (suggestion) that the game state shifts to state B upon completion of the 2R jackpot (end of game in state C) ) The third notice image 503 (third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern including a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern including a combination of 502 and the third notice image 503. The display of the notice image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed in the reach outlier variation from the start of the variation before the reach failure is confirmed, and in the reach variation the third effect from the start of the variation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the change), the change C is a continuation of state C (an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur) (win) , It is possible to obtain a staging effect that arouse the player's expectation and anxiety such as whether the player is undecided or finished (defeated). If the reach variation is a big hit variation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) in the variation (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the notice image is displayed. At a predetermined time in the middle (during battle production), the display mode of the notice image displayed at that time can change. Due to such a change in the display mode, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the preview image being displayed and suggest that it is highly likely that the subsequent game development will be advantageous to the player, or at an early stage before the end of the fluctuation, It is possible to increase the player's expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C will be described. As described above, when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the selected effect mode is set. Can be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", and "4R fourth big hit" are big hits that are the triggers for setting the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), It is possible to select the effect modes C and D at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the big hit game is started, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the big hit game is finished can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period is different between "4R first big hit" and "4R fourth big hit" and "15R third big hit". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs control processing related to production mode selection such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of a production mode based on operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, it is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, in the state A (left-handed game), the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as the first hit, the state B or C (right-handed game) when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and "4R 4th big hit" occurs, that is, mode selection when "4R 4th big hit" occurs as a condominium The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are over. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command and (S2116), the big hit ending period is started (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit side can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, "4R ending command" for "4R first big hit" and "4R fourth big hit", and "15R ending command" for "15R third big hit". It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R big hit game is "15 seconds", and the ending time for the 15R big hit game is "5". Seconds ". It should be noted that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen is mainly composed of an image 701 indicating "production mode C" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode C selection image") and an image 702 indicating "production mode D" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode D selection image"). And are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as a “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right. The display of the mode selection screen 700 informs the player that the mode selection period is in progress.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is being displayed, the image 701 (mode C selected image) and the image 702 (mode D selected image) to be selected alternate with each operation. It is assumed that the image displayed in an emphasized manner (that is, the effect mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (emphasized) in a thick frame and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). There is. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, thereby selecting the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high-accuracy low base state). can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, when 12 seconds have passed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), the countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the number image 704 is subtracted by 1 in the order of “3” → “2” → “1” and displayed. This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the numerical image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). After this, until the ending period ends, an effect display (not shown) showing the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of the state C to be subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in the state C, the effect mode (C or D) that has been set (selected). Source production game production production is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and "15R third big hit" occurs, that is, "15R third big hit" occurs as a condominium In the case of doing, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, of the 1R to 15R, the period from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R is the mode selection period. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. The sub-control unit side can recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed) such as "1R start command", "2R start command" ... "15R start command".

  When the sub control unit 90 receives a "13R start command" designating the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of 13R, it responds to this. The round effect command to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 13R round effect is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. The display of the notification screen 810 notifies the player that the mode selection period will start from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (pre-selection period start notification, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode in a new mode is reached such that the production mode selection period is generated (started). Selection is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each of the winning balls based on the entrance into the first special winning opening 30 during the big hit game (the reception of the first special winning opening entrance command). It is designed to be continuously displayed even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and then the first big hit in the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game or the big hit game. The addition is also displayed by entering the winning hole 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 will display the total number of acquired prize balls during the period from the first hit to the consecutive holidays.

  Next, when the sub control unit 90 receives the “14R start command” that specifies the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R big hit game described above, and it is assumed that the mode selection screen 700 is reduced. There is. By the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is informed that the mode selection period is in progress (notification during the selection period, second informing means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (switching the mode selection images up and down) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, detailed description of the effect mode selection in 14R is omitted. The screen configuration (display contents) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives the “15R start command” that specifies the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 sends the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ) To. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 15R round effect is executed. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a and a part of the round effect screen 800 (in the present embodiment, the upper left side of the screen). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started with the start of 15R. This countdown display is similar to the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62 (c)), and the numerical image is “3” → “2” → as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (pre-selection period end notification, third notification means). Then, the countdown display is ended in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), whereby the mode selection period is ended.

  After this, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D). Source production game production production is executed.

  In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to "production mode C" at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. , Or “production mode D”, a mode selection period occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left hitting game) and a 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right hitting game). The timing of occurrence differs from that of the case. That is, the timing of occurrence of the mode selection period is different between the first hit in the state A where the left-handed game is played and the continuous hit in the state B or C where the right-handed game is played. It has become a thing. In addition, if you take another way of looking, it is the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, 4R jackpot game (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4 jackpot) or 15R jackpot game (15R 3 jackpot) The generation timing of the mode selection period differs depending on whether or not Therefore, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the long-distance play) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the time when the production mode can be selected is different or the production mode selection It is possible to change the mode.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games have ended, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when a 15R big hit game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) in the middle of 14R to 15R (final R) during the big hit game, but in 13R before the occurrence of the mode selection period (before start) , A notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period will be started from the next round is displayed (notification before start of selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. It is displayed (notification during selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before end of selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c) and (d)). Thus, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all the round games. Given to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  In addition, the ending period of the 4R jackpot, which has a relatively small number of rounds, is longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot, which has a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period of the 4R jackpot. ing. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of winning balls) is small compared to the 15R jackpot and the execution period of the jackpot game is short as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in the present embodiment). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from the start to the end of the mode selection period, notification relating to the effect mode selection (selection period) Notification before start, notification during selection period, notification before end of selection period) are performed. This makes it possible for the player not to miss the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Demonstration in low accuracy and low base state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, the main effects performed in the low accurate low base state will be described. Here, FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the flow of effects performed in the low accurate low base state. FIG. 68 is a screen view (No. 1) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accurate low base state. FIG. 69 is a screen view (No. 2) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accurate low base state. FIG. 70 is a screen diagram (3) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accurate low base state.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the vertical widths of these display screens 71a and 72a are ( An image display device is provided which is sufficiently narrower than the vertical width of the first display screen 7a (of the single image display device 7). If the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a are shown together on the premise of this configuration, the images displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a become small, and the visual recognition is difficult. There is concern that it will be difficult. Therefore, in the screen diagrams of FIG. 68 and subsequent figures, for convenience of explanation, the vertical widths of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a are made substantially the same as the vertical width of the first display screen 7a, and if necessary, these The image displayed on the display screen of FIG.

Further, in the following description based on FIG. 67 to FIG. 84, for convenience of description, the first effect hold 9a indicating that the first special symbol hit determination is held is simply referred to as a “hold icon”, and this hold icon is The display area to be displayed will be referred to as a hold icon display area 9c (in place of the first effect hold display area 9c). Also, the “corresponding icon” as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being displayed in variation is displayed in the icon display area 9e (see, for example, FIG. 68 (A)). It will be described as a thing.
Further, each effect described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84 is the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set by the variation effect pattern setting process in step S4505 in FIG. 52 and the notice effect setting process in step S4506 in FIG. This is realized by transmitting a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of the notice effect set by the above, and the image control board 100 performs processing based on this variation effect start command. It

  In FIG. 68 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol hit determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “miss”, a disparity of “526” is displayed. The state where the first effect image 8 shown is stopped and displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, when the first special symbol hit determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 68 (A)) is executed, In the 1 special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol showing the result of the first special symbol hit determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e. The shift process is performed, and the variable display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIGS. 67 (A) and 68 (B)). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of the symbol strings of the effect symbols in which the numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top are three rows in the horizontal direction. It is displayed, and as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of three symbol columns is started so that these symbol columns scroll from top to bottom.

  Here, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination performed at the start of variable display of the first special symbol is "miss" and it is decided not to execute the reach effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. At the end of the game, the three effect symbols indicating the broke (for example, "458") are pseudo-stopped, and the three special symbols are stopped as the first special symbol is displayed. (See FIG. 67 (B)).

  Here, "pseudo stop" means to swing the effect symbol on the spot with almost no movement, and "main stop" means to completely stop the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "big hit", or if it is determined to perform reach production for "miss", during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, production A predetermined left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column of the symbol display area 7b, and subsequently, a right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) showing the same effect symbol as the left symbol is generated in the right column of the effect symbol display area 7b. A pre-reach effect that causes a pseudo stop is performed. Then, as a result of such pre-reach effect, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo stopped, the reach is established (see FIG. 67 (C)).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, so-called pseudo continuous production may be performed as such pre-reach production before the reach is established. This pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is variably displayed multiple times in the effect symbol display area 7b during one variable display of the special symbol. When this pseudo continuous effect is executed before the reach is established, the following effect display is performed.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, for example, first, the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (C)), and then, the right symbol. Is a different right symbol (for example, one symbol) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (D)), and then 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for informing the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 68 (E)). .

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is notified by pseudo stopping 7 symbols in the middle row, but in another embodiment, the player performs a pseudo continuous effect such as "NEXT". The recognizable special symbol may be pseudo-stopped in the middle row to notify the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  As described above, after the effect symbols which are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo second station is started following the variation effect of the pseudo first station. It Specifically, after the character "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second-order variation effect is largely displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is first displayed. A small display is made in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and along with this, scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed (see FIG. 68 (F)).

  Then, at the time of starting the variation display of the first special symbol this time, if the variation effect pattern that establishes the reach is set during the variation effect of the second pseudo series, the predetermined variation is started after the variation effect of the second pseudo series is started. When time passes, first, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 68 (G)), and then the right symbol (for example, 2 symbols) same as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is reached. It is established (see FIG. 68 (H)).

  Up to this point, the case has been described as an example where "pre-reach pseudo-relation" is performed in which seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and a pseudo-reproduction is performed before the reach is established, but the same as the left symbol and the right symbol. In some cases, after the production symbols are pseudo-stopped, the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and the pseudo-reproduction is performed, so that "reach after pseudo-relation" is performed.

  As described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo stopped and the reach is established, the player is expected to stop the same effect symbol as these effect symbols (reach symbol) in the middle row. A predetermined reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, as a reach effect that can be executed with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 67, a normal short reach, a normal long reach, a first SP reach, a There are 5 types of reach effects, 2SP reach and SPSP reach.

  The normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect that has a shorter effect execution time than a normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, first, the normal short reach is performed (see FIGS. 67 (C) and (F)). When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is formed between the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. A scroll display of a middle symbol row for pseudo-stopping a different middle symbol is performed (see FIG. 68 (I)). In FIG. 68 (I), one symbol less "1" than the reach symbol passes on the effective line between the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol (two symbols here) same as the reach symbol is the effective line. It is illustrated that it is approaching.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern for notifying the winning by the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is set, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed by the normal short reach. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination of this time is "big hit", the medium symbol same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line to make a doublet (for example, "222"). After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is "miss", the reach symbol (for example, "232") is produced by pseudo-stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the activated line. After the pseudo stop, a loss notification effect for stopping the effect symbols as they are is performed.

  On the other hand, when a variation effect pattern that develops from normal short reach to another reach effect is set, the following effect is performed. For example, in the case where a variation effect pattern for notifying a win or loss is set by normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)), the normal short reach is set. At the end of the reach, a long development suggestion production (see FIG. 69 (A)) that suggests the development to a normal long reach is performed, and at the same time, the high speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is restarted, and a normal long reach (FIG. 67 (H ) See) develops reach production. In this normal long reach, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (B), effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects the symbols to be aligned in the central area of the first display screen 7a.

  Note that the normal long reach is a reach effect having the second highest jackpot reliability after the normal short reach among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). In most cases, the normal long reach is reached. It is performed in the normal long reach without any development from other reach production (see Fig. 67 (G)), but if the result of the 1st special symbol hit / miss judgment this time is a big hit, it will be a normal long reach. The hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) may be performed. Further, when a variation effect pattern that develops from normal long reach to another reach effect is set, normal long reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) ), Reach production will be developed.

  Here, the 1st SP reach is a reach effect with the second highest jackpot reliability after the normal long reach (eg, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and when developing from the normal long reach to the 1st SP reach, it is as follows. Display is performed. That is, the high-speed scroll of the middle row of symbols is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b, While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the area is moved to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display that expects a big hit is performed.

  In this way, when the first SP reach is developed, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)) for notifying the winning is performed in the first SP reach, and the predetermined development gimmick effect from the first SP reach (FIG. 67 (L)) to develop SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) develops into the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) without passing through the normal long reach, , The normal short reach may directly develop to the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)).

  Here, the 2nd SP reach is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is slightly higher than that of the 1st SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and when developing from a normal short reach to a 2nd SP reach, Display is performed. That is, the high-speed scroll of the middle row of symbols is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b, While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the area is moved to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display that expects a big hit is performed.

  In this way, the first SP reach and the second SP reach have the same screen configuration, and the effect display that expects a big hit is performed, but these reach effects have different effect contents. Specifically, in the 1st SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), if the own character can prevent the enemy character from attacking, it will be a big hit, and conversely, if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character from attacking, it will be lost. Performance display is performed. On the other hand, the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)) is configured as a mission effect, and if the player character succeeds in the mission, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the player character fails in the mission, a player effect display is displayed. .

  When the 1st SP reach or the 2nd SP reach is developed, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the hit notification effect is the hit notification effect in the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)). Easier to execute than. Therefore, when the SPSP reach is developed to the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player plays the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67L) through the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) as in the case of the normal long reach. 67 (N)).

  Here, SPSP reach is the reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above-mentioned 5 types of reach effects. In this embodiment, this SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) is always developed through the development gimmick production (see FIG. 67 (L)) that suggests the development to SPSP reach, and as the production pattern. As shown in FIG. 67, a production pattern in which an evolved gimmick production occurs immediately after the reach is established and develops into an SPSP reach, and an production pattern in which an evolved gimmick production occurs during a normal long reach and develops into an SPSP reach There is an effect pattern in which an evolved gimmick effect occurs during the first SP reach and develops into an SPSP reach, and an effect pattern in which an evolved gimmick effect occurs during the second SP reach and develops into an SPSP reach.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the advanced gimmick effect to be performed at some timing during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set before the reach is established during the variable display of the first special symbol or immediately after the reach is established, during normal long reach, during the first SP reach, during the second SP reach, etc. A notice production with a relatively high jackpot reliability called the first big chance announcement (see FIG. 67 (E)) that suggests that the jackpot is relatively high (jackpot reliability: about 33% (see FIG. 75 (B))) When the first big chance notice is generated, there is a feature that the reach production with high reliability (SPSP reach in this embodiment) is easily developed.

  Therefore, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the player first issues the first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)), and then the developed gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) occurs. You can enjoy the game while expecting to do it. Note that the first big chance notice and the rank-up effect that can suggest the occurrence of the first big chance notice will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75.

  Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the case of directly developing from the advanced gimmick effect to the SPSP reach and the advanced gimmick effect of the second major chance notice (FIG. 67 (M)) There is a case that it develops into SPSP reach via the reference). This second big chance notice is a notice effect that suggests that the jackpot reliability is extremely high (the hit notification effect is relatively likely to be executed) (jackpot reliability: about 58%: figure 75 (B)), the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second big chance notice will be generated subsequently when the advanced gimmick effect is generated.

  Next, a specific example of an effect that is performed when an advanced gimmick effect is generated in the final stage of the normal long reach and an SPSP reach is reached via the second big chance notice will be described. In the case of directly developing from normal long reach to SPSP reach without passing through the first SP reach, for example, at the end of normal long reach (see FIG. 69 (B)), the effect design showing the reach lose pattern is pseudo-stopped and lost. The pseudo-missing effect (see FIG. 69C) is made to appear. After that, the character "Roulette Chance" indicating that the development destination selection effect of selecting the type of SPSP reach to be developed is performed is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the development destination is displayed. A selection effect (see FIG. 69 (D)) is performed.

  In the case of the development to the development destination selection effect, as illustrated in FIG. 69D, a panel corresponding to each of the four types of SPSP reach having different jackpot reliability is displayed. Specifically, a panel that corresponds to an A battle in which your character battles with an enemy character A, a panel that corresponds to a B battle in which your character battles with an enemy character B, and a C battle where your character battles with an enemy character C. And a panel corresponding to the X battle in which the own character battles with the enemy character X are displayed on the first display screen 7a. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 69 (D), the number of stars suggests the degree of expectation that a winning effect will be produced when the four panels all develop into the corresponding SPSP reach. , It is suggested that the degree of expectation that the winning effect is performed and the jackpot gaming state is different from each other.

  Further, when the development to the development destination selection effect is advanced, in addition to the four panels, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are shown. Validity period gauge is displayed. In the case of development to the development destination selection effect, the roulette effect in which the above four panels are sequentially highlighted is started before the effective period starts. Note that FIG. 69D exemplifies a state in which the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted. In this way, the effective period is started while the roulette effect is being performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period, the roulette effect is ended and one of the panels is highlighted. It will be in the state of being. Then, here, for example, when the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted, the panel suggesting the A battle is enlarged and displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 69). (See (E)) is performed.

  In the destination selection effect, the SPSP reach that is highlighted at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a is not necessarily selected, and the effect pattern set at the start of this symbol variation is set. Either panel is selected based on

  In this way, when the development destination suggesting production that suggests that the SP reach is developed, the development gimmick production (see FIGS. 67 (L) and 69 (F)) is always performed. This development gimmick production is a production that suggests the development to SPSP by using the movable decorative member 14 as a production accessory. In the advanced gimmick effect, although not shown in FIG. 69 (F), the movable decorative member 14 moves so as to drop from the initial position to the effect position that covers the central region of the first display screen 7a, and the first display. Predetermined advanced gimmick effect images are displayed in the peripheral area not covered by the movable decorative member 14 on the screen 7a, and advanced gimmick effect sounds corresponding to these effects are output from the speaker 67.

  Next, in the case where the development gimmick effect is expanded to the second large opportunity notice, when the movable decorative member 14 returns to the initial position and a predetermined time elapses, the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen are displayed. A predetermined second large-chance preliminary announcement image including the characters "Geki-atsu" is displayed on the screen 72a, and a predetermined second large-chance preliminary announcement sound is output from the speaker 67 to give the second large-chance preliminary announcement. The second big chance notice may be any form of presentation as long as the player can recognize that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. For example, the second big chance notice may be accompanied by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It may be. Further, in another embodiment, it may be accompanied by the operation of the effect character provided on the front frame 51 or the outer frame 53.

  In this way, when the second major chance announcement is given following the development gimmick production, the SPSP reach is started. In this SPSP reach, first, a title display for notifying the type of SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 69 (H)). In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the panel corresponding to the A battle is selected by the development destination selection effect that can be performed prior to the development gimmick effect, in FIG. 69 (H), the player character is the enemy character A. The title display suggesting that the SPSP reach (A battle) is developed is illustrated.

  In addition, in the title display performed at the start of SPSP reach, there are a case where the characters forming the title display are displayed in white, a case where they are displayed in red, and a case where they are displayed in rainbow.

  On the other hand, after the title is displayed and before the end of the SPSP reach is reached, an effect display is displayed in which the player character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeatedly attack and defend. Then, when the end of SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

  In this first effect button operation promotion effect, at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period, or when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a, the first effect button 63a An effect called cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is a notice effect that suggests how big the jackpot reliability is, and in the present embodiment, a green cut-in (see FIG. 70 (A)) that superimposes a green cut-in image is displayed. 70A, a red cut-in for superimposing a red cut-in image (see FIG. 70B), and a gold cut-in for superimposing a gold cut-in image (see FIG. 70C). May occur.

  When the cut-in occurs in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70D to 70F) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. . During the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", And an effective period. A valid period gauge that indicates the remaining time is displayed. In the present embodiment, as the second effect button image, a case where a second effect button image showing a small second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70D) and a second effect button having a medium size is used. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)) and when the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (F)). ) There is.

  When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (O)) is an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation. Done. In other words, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is a big hit, the winning effect that shows how the own character wins over the enemy character, and the actual stop after the effect pattern of the double-eye effect is stopped. Information presentation is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment this time is a loss, the defeat effect that represents the situation where your character is defeated by the enemy character and reach loss Information presentation is performed.

  It should be noted that the size of the second effect button 63b indicated by the second effect button image displayed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the second size of the medium size. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), the second effect button image showing the smaller second effect button 63b is displayed (FIG. 70 (D)). ), The hit notification effect (see FIG. 70 (G)) is more likely to be executed as the operation corresponding effect. Further, when the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70D), the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b having a medium size is displayed. Compared with the case where is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), there is a feature that the loss notification effect (see FIG. 70 (H)) is easily executed as the operation corresponding effect.

  Further, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be displayed when the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination this time is a hit, but is not displayed when it is a loss. There is. Therefore, the second effect button operation promotion effect that displays the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be said to be a notice effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%.

[About chance up during SPSP reach]
Next, referring to FIG. 71, the chance increase during SPSP reach will be described. Here, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a chance increase during SPSP reach.

  The title display (see FIG. 69 (H)) performed in the early stage of SPSP reach has a jackpot reliability of about 15% when the characters forming the title display are white, as illustrated in FIG. 71. The jackpot reliability is about 37% when the character color is red, and the jackpot reliability is 100% when the character color is iridescent.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the jackpot reliability when displaying characters constituting the title display in white or red is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability when displaying the characters forming the display in white or red may be different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the middle stage of the SPSP reach, when the effect display showing how the own character and the enemy character repeatedly attack and defense is displayed, the frame lamp 66 is caused to emit a predetermined light emission color. In some cases, an effect called a frame flash that outputs a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 may be performed. The jackpot reliability of the frame flash that emits the frame lamp 66 in red is about 53%, and the frame lamp 66 is iridescent. The jackpot reliability of the frame flash to be emitted at is 100%.

  Further, although not shown in the figure, during the SPSP reach, a predetermined music corresponding to the SPSP reach is output from the speaker 67. On the other hand, during SPSP reach, there is a case where a chance-up effect called a music change for changing this predetermined music to another special music occurs, and this music change has a jackpot reliability of about 70%. It has become a chance up production.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 71, a green cut-in is performed for the operation of the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect during SPSP reach (see FIG. 69 (I)). The jackpot reliability when it occurs is about 7%, the jackpot reliability when the red cut-in occurs is about 56%, and the jackpot reliability when the gold cut-in occurs is about 71%.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case where the jackpot reliability of the blue cut-in, the red cut-in, and the gold cut-in is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach will be described. The cut-in jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the type of SPSP reach.

  On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 71, with respect to the second effect button operation promotion effect in the final stage of SPSP reach, an effect of displaying a second effect button image showing a small second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70D). The jackpot reliability of is about 16%, the jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70E) that displays the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b of medium degree is about 55%, which is large. The jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70F) for displaying the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b is 100%. Although not shown in the figure, a vibration motor that vibrates the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b is provided in the vicinity of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and the second effect button on the final stage of the SPSP reach. In the operation promotion effect, there is a case where an opportunity increase effect that the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b vibrate is performed before the effective period starts. The production of the chance increase using this vibration motor can be executed when the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination this time is a big hit, while the big hit reliability is 100% which is not executed when it is a loss. Has become.

[About rank up production]
Next, the rank-up effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. Here, FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rank-up effect. FIG. 73 is a screen view (part 1) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect. FIG. 74 is a screen view (part 2) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect.

  The rank-up effect is a notice effect that is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and is configured as a step effect in which the display mode of the character image (see FIG. 73D, for example) is changed stepwise. In the present embodiment, this rank-up effect can be changed stepwise up to any of five steps or less, with the fifth step being the upper limit. That is, in the present embodiment, when the rank-up effect started in the first stage ends in the first stage, and when the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the second stage and ends. And the case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the third stage and ends, and the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fourth stage. In some cases, the rank-up effect started in the first stage is finally developed to the fifth stage and ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the rank-up effect will be described, taking as an example the case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

  In FIG. 73 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “miss”, there is a gap of “445”. The state in which the effect symbol shown is stopped and displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, if the first special symbol hit determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 73 (A)) is executed, In the 1 special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol showing the result of the first special symbol hit determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e. The shift process is performed and the variable display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIG. 73 (B)). In addition, in the screen diagrams of FIG. 73C and subsequent figures, the representation of the effect symbol displayed on the first display screen 7a is omitted for convenience of description.

  Here, if it is set to execute the rank-up effect during the variable display of the first special symbol this time, when the variable display of the three symbol columns is started and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, A white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 73 (C)). In this way, when the white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed, the character movement effect of moving this white character image from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 72 (A)). ) Is done. Specifically, the white character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is moved to the left (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 73 (C)), and the left end of the first display screen 7a is moved. The white character image that has moved to is deleted from the first display screen 7a, and at the same time, the white character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIGS. 73C and 73D).

  By performing such a character movement effect, it is possible to make the white character image displayed on the first display screen 7a appear to have moved to the second display screen 71a. When the rank-up effect is executed, a character image larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a after the character movement effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the rank-up effect is performed. The production is started.

  Therefore, the player is more likely to notice that the character image is displayed and ranks up compared to the case where the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the rank-up effect is started without performing the character movement effect. It is possible to effectively notify that the effect has started.

  Immediately after the character movement effect is performed, the rank-up effect is in the first stage, and the white character image corresponding to the first stage is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 73D). ). On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is changed stepwise after the second step, a predetermined charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (E), the other white character image (hereinafter, referred to as “snowman image”) that is the same as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is the first one. An effect display that is displayed on the display screen 7a and shows that the snowman image throws a white star-shaped item against the character image in order to inject energy into the character image on the second display screen 71a is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the second stage, the character color change success effect of changing the portion below the knees of the character image to blue corresponding to the second stage (FIG. 72 (C), FIG. 73 ( See F)).

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the second stage, the character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) in which the display color of the character image does not change from white even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

  When developing the rank-up effect from the second stage to the third stage, the second charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (G), the same blue snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the character image is further displayed. In order to inject energy, a performance display is displayed in which the snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item at the character image. Then, in order to develop the rank-up effect to the third stage, a character color change that changes the character image from the knees of both legs to blue to a character image in which both legs are green (corresponding to the third stage) Success production (see FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 73 (H)) is performed.

  On the other hand, if the rank-up effect is not developed to the third stage, a character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) in which the display color of the character image does not change from blue even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

  When developing the rank-up effect from the third stage to the fourth stage, the third charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (I), the same green snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the character image is further displayed. In order to inject energy, a performance display is displayed in which the snowman image throws a green star-shaped item at the character image. When the rank-up effect is expanded to the fourth stage, a character color change success effect that changes a character image whose both feet are green to a red character image (corresponding to the fourth step) other than both hands ( FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 74 (A)) are performed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the fourth stage, a character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) in which the display color of the character image does not change from green even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

  When developing the rank-up effect from the fourth stage to the upper limit fifth stage, the fourth charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 74 (B), the same red snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the character image is further displayed. In order to inject energy, a demonstration display is displayed in which the snowman image throws a red star-shaped item at the character image. Then, when developing the rank-up effect to the fifth stage, a character color change success effect that changes the character image in which all hands other than red are red to a character image in which the whole is gold (corresponding to the fifth stage) ( 72 (C) and 74 (C)) are performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to start the rank-up effect, and after the rank-up effect is started, the character is displayed. A configuration is adopted in which an image is displayed on the second display screen 71a to change the character image. In this way, since the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a prior to the character image being displayed on the second display screen 71a, it is possible to easily notify the start of the rank-up effect. . In addition, since a moving effect is made in which the character image is made to look like moving from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a, the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the first display screen 7a is changed to the second display screen 71a. Can be guided to.

  Up to this point, the case where the rank-up effect develops to the upper limit of the fifth stage has been described, but in the present embodiment, a jackpot game may be executed in response to the rank-up effect developing to the fifth stage. A configuration is adopted in which a first big chance notice that indicates that there is is executed. Specifically, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the stage 4 or lower and ends, that is, the display color of the character image finally changes to a color below red and the rank-up effect ends. In this case, after the rank-up effect is finished, the first big chance notice may be executed (see FIG. 72 (G)) or the first big chance notice may not be executed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the fifth stage and ends, that is, when the display color of the character image finally changes to gold and the rank-up effect ends, the rank-up effect ends. After the completion of step 1, the first large chance notice is always executed (see FIGS. 72C and 72F). From this, when performing the rank-up effect during the variable display of the first special symbol for which the first big chance notice is not executed, the rank-up effect that finally develops to the fifth stage is not executed. Finally, the rank-up effect that develops only up to the fourth stage will be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rank-up effect that finally develops to the upper limit of the fifth stage and ends is executed, the first big chance notice is always executed after that. Therefore, when the display color of the character image is changed to gold, the countdown effect (see FIG. 72 (E)) for counting down the remaining time until just before the first big chance notice is started is executed. Has been adopted.

  Therefore, when the character color change success effect (see FIG. 74 (C)) for changing the display color of the character image to gold is performed, the phrase "until a large chance notice" is displayed from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen. The moving display is displayed so that the moving object is displayed as if it is moving to 71a (see FIGS. 74D to 74G). Then, right above the icon display area 9e, a white number "4" indicating that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the first large opportunity notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is 4 seconds. 74D is displayed (see FIG. 74 (D)), and every 1 second after the countdown effect image is displayed, the number indicated by the countdown effect image is changed to "4", "3", "2". ], "1", and "0" are counted down in this order, and a countdown effect is performed (see FIGS. 74D to 74G).

  It should be noted that in FIG. 74, since the remaining time from the time when the display color of the character image is changed to gold to the timing immediately before the execution of the first great chance notice is 4 seconds, the number shown by the countdown effect image is displayed. The case where the initial value is “4” is illustrated, but since the remaining time from the time when the display color of the character image changes to gold to the timing immediately before the execution of the first large chance notice is variable, The initial value of the number shown by the countdown effect image is also variable. That is, for example, the countdown effect may be performed from "5" or the countdown effect may be performed from "3".

  In this way, when the countdown effect related to the rank-up effect is performed and the number indicated by the countdown effect image becomes “0”, the character image changed to gold moves from the second display screen 71a to the first display screen 7a. A character moving effect (see FIG. 74 (H)) is performed that makes the user look like that. Then, when the golden character image moves to the central region of the first display screen 7a by this character movement effect, an effect image showing that the character image is full of force is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and " The character "Great chance" is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 74 (I)), and the speaker 67 outputs a predetermined sound effect corresponding to the first great chance announcement. .

  This first big chance notice may be executed even if the rank-up effect is not performed, but the countdown effect image related to the rank-up effect is displayed immediately above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. When the countdown effect for counting down the number indicated by the countdown effect image is executed, the first large chance notice is executed according to the end of the countdown effect.

  Even when the display color of the character image finally changes to only red or less, the first big chance notice may be executed, but the first big chance notice may not be executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display color of the character image finally changes only to the red or less, even if the first big chance notice is executed, immediately before the first big chance notice is executed. The above-described countdown effect based on the timing of is not executed.

  In this way, when the first big chance notice is generated during the variation display of the first special symbol, the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) is generated thereafter, or money is paid at the end of the SPSP reach. Cut-in (see FIG. 70C) may occur. Therefore, when the first big chance notice is generated, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second big chance notice and the gold cut-in will be combined.

  In addition, here, the case where the rank-up effect is developed step by step has been described as an example with reference to FIGS. 73 to 74, but the rank-up effect is achieved by one charge effect and character color change effect. It may develop in multiple stages. For example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) showing that a snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, both hands are removed. A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74A) in which a part of the character image changes to red may be performed. In addition, for example, when a charging effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) representing that a snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, the character A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74 (C)) in which the entire image changes to gold may be performed.

(Advantages of the rank-up effect)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a when the rank-up effect is started, the player who is gazing at the first display screen 7a It is possible to effectively prevent a problem such as not being aware of the start of the rank-up effect. After the rank-up effect is started, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (instead of the central area of the first display screen 7a), so that the display area for displaying the character image is fixed. It is possible to execute a rank-up effect that is rich in change and highly entertaining as compared with the case where there is. In addition, after the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a in place of the central area of the first display screen 7a. Can be performed, and a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the rank-up effect and other effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a. Therefore, when these effect images have the same size, or when the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is larger than the character image displayed on the central region of the first display screen 7a. In comparison, the player can easily recognize that the rank-up effect has started, and the player does not notice that the rank-up effect has started, and thus the original effect of the rank-up effect cannot be obtained. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of problems.

  Further, when the rank-up effect develops to the fifth stage, the first big chance notice is executed, so it is possible to expect the player to develop the rank-up effect to the upper limit fifth stage. It is possible to obtain high staging effect by the synergistic effect of the above and the first big chance notice.

(Characteristics of rank up production)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of various notice effects such as rank-up effects, and FIG. 75 (A) illustrates the characteristics of rank-up effects. As illustrated in FIG. 75A, when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally white is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 1%, and the display color of the character image is When the final rank-up effect is blue, the jackpot reliability is about 2%. Further, when the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes green is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 4%, and the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red is achieved. When it is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 23%, and when the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 45%.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed, the timing until immediately before the execution of the first great opportunity notice is performed. If a countdown effect is displayed in which the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner, and on the other hand, a rank up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red or less is performed, even if the first big chance notice is given thereafter. The feature is that the above countdown effect is not performed.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red is performed, or when the display color of the character image finally becomes gold When the production is performed, there is a feature that the SPSP reach is surely developed after that. In other words, the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally becomes red or gold is performed only when the variation effect pattern that finally develops into SPSP reach is set.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed, there is a 100% probability that the first big chance notice will be issued thereafter. Will occur. This is as described above. On the other hand, when the display color of the character image finally remains white, the probability that the first big chance notice will be generated thereafter is extremely low, and the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes blue is achieved. If performed, if the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image is finally green is performed, in the order of the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image is finally red, The probability that the first big chance notice will occur later will increase.

  That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the first large chance announcement (see FIG. 74 (I)) that suggests that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed. Then, in the rank-up effect, when displaying a white character image, when displaying a blue character image, and when displaying a green character image as a character image that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed. The first large chance notice is most likely to be executed when the character image of gold is displayed, when the character image of red is displayed, and when the character image of gold is displayed. There is.

(Modifications related to rank-up performance)
The following configurations may be adopted for the rank-up effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a case has been described as an example where a charging effect that changes the display color of the character image is performed using a snowman image different from the character image, but in other embodiments, for example, the second display screen 71a. A character image (common character image) common to the character image displayed on the first display screen 7a is displayed, and the common character image moves toward the character image and is integrated with the character image. You may make it produce and change the display color of a character image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display color of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the size of the character image is changed stepwise and the shape of the character image is changed. You may change in steps. Further, in another embodiment, any two of the display color, size, and shape of the character image are changed stepwise, or three display colors, size, and shape of the character image are used. May be changed stepwise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described as an example in which the display color of a part of the character image is changed stepwise, but in another embodiment, the display color of the entire character image is changed stepwise. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the character image is changed stepwise as the stage effect image has been described as an example, but the stage effect image is not limited to the character image, and for example, a predetermined item may be changed stepwise. It may be changed.

(The jackpot reliability of each production pattern)
In FIG. 75 (B), the jackpot reliability when each of the notice effects is performed alone and the jackpot reliability when each of the notice effects are combined are illustrated. As illustrated in FIG. 75B, when the first big chance announcement is executed alone, the big hit reliability is about 33%. On the other hand, as also illustrated in FIG. 75 (B), in the case where the first big chance notice is given after the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold is performed. The jackpot reliability resulting from these two types of notice production is about 49%, which is higher than the case where the first big chance notice is executed alone.

  Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to combine the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold with the first big chance notice, and the synergistic effect of these notice effects makes it possible to achieve a high level. It is possible to obtain a staging effect.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a notice effect that suggests that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed, as shown in FIG. In addition, the second big chance notice may be given or a gold cut-in may be performed. If the second big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%. Is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%.

  On the other hand, when the first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) and the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability due to these two types of notice productions. The degree is about 66%, and when the first big chance announcement is executed alone (big hit reliability: about 33%) or when the second big chance announcement is executed alone (big hit reliability: about 58%). ), The jackpot reliability is higher. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect that a combination of these notice effects will be provided, instead of executing one of the notice of the first big chance and the notice of the second big chance, and It is possible to obtain a high staging effect by the synergistic effect of the second big chance announcement.

  If the result of the first special symbol win / loss judgment is a big hit, three types of first big chance notice, second big chance notice, and gold cut-in are displayed during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to this prize determination. It is possible to combine the notice production of. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a loss, the notice effect pattern for combining the above three types of notice effects is not set during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to this hit determination. . That is, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a loss, the selection of the notice effect pattern for combining the three types of notice effects is limited. Therefore, when the first big chance notice and the second big chance notice are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability is about 66%, whereas the first big chance notice, the second big chance notice, And when the gold cut-in is compounded within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability due to these notice effects is 100%.

  Therefore, when the first big chance notice is generated, it is expected that the second big chance notice is generated, and when these great chance notices are generated, it is expected that the gold cut-in will occur. As described above, it is possible to expect the player to combine these three types of advance notice effects, and it is possible to obtain an extremely high effect effect by the synergistic effect of these three types of advance notice effects.

[Specific example of first countdown effect]
Next, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of the first countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, the first countdown effect image showing a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the first countdown is performed. There may be a case where a first countdown effect for counting down the number indicated by the effect image is executed. When the first countdown effect is executed, a predetermined first suggestion effect indicating that the jackpot game may be executed is executed in response to the end of the first countdown effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described by taking as an example the case where the first countdown effect is performed three times during the variable display of the first special symbol once in the low accurate low base state.

  In FIG. 76 (A), the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the state in which the variable display of the effect design corresponding to the icon is started is illustrated. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbols is started, the first countdown used for the first countdown effect is displayed in the display area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. An effect image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (B)). Since the first countdown effect for the first time is not started, the first countdown effect image showing the character "standby" is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c in FIG. 76 (B). The state displayed in is illustrated.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first countdown effect is executed a plurality of times during the variable display of the first special symbol once, in order to suggest that, the first countdown effect The configuration that can display a suggestion image suggesting that the execution of No. 1 is suspended on the second display screen 71a is adopted, and in FIG. 76 (B), the execution of three first countdown effects is suspended. In order to suggest that the three standby images including the characters “waiting” are displayed on the second display screen 71a.

  After the first countdown effect image relating to the first first countdown effect is displayed, at the start timing of the first countdown effect of the first time, the first countdown effect image showing the character "standby" is displayed. , The first countdown effect image indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is changed in accordance with the end of the first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76B and 76C). Here, since the first countdown effect for the first time has been started, it is displayed on the second display screen 71a in FIGS. 76B and 76C (first countdown effect for the first time). It is illustrated that the suggestion image (corresponding to the) is erased from the second display screen 71a.

  FIG. 76C illustrates the state immediately after the suggestion image corresponding to the first first countdown effect has been erased, but two suggestion images are displayed on the second display screen 71a. Since the state is left as it is, the player can easily recognize that the first countdown effect is performed twice after the first countdown effect for the first time is completed.

  In addition, in FIG. 76 (C), the first countdown effect indicating the number “8:51” is shown to indicate that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is 8.51 seconds. Although the state in which the image is displayed is illustrated, in the present embodiment, there are cases where this number is displayed in white and cases where it is displayed in red, and the latter is the jackpot reliability compared to the former. It is characterized by high

  In this way, when the first countdown effect is started for the first time, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image decreases with the passage of time, and finally the number "0:00" is changed. The state is as shown (see FIG. 76 (D)). Then, here, since the above-described pseudo continuous effect is executed (as the first suggestive effect) immediately after the first first countdown effect is finished, the number "0:00" indicated by the first countdown effect image. Is switched to the character "NEXT" (see FIGS. 76 (D) and (E)), and the character "NEXT" is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. , The first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76E and 76F).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the left 6 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped at the same time. A pseudo continuous production is performed. Then, in order to start the change effect of the pseudo second series following the change effect of the first pseudo series, the character “× 2” indicating the start of the change effect of the pseudo second series is the central area of the first display screen 7a. After being displayed in large size, the character of “× 2” is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted accordingly (FIG. 76 (F ) And (G)).

  When the pseudo second-order variation effect is started, the suspended second countdown effect is immediately started. Therefore, as illustrated in FIGS. 76F and 76G, the first countdown effect image showing the number “8:51” is newly added to the area directly above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. And the suggestion image corresponding to the second first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this way, when the second countdown effect is started along with the start of the pseudo second consecutive change effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down. Then, for example, at the timing immediately after the reach is established with one symbol, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image becomes “0:00” (see FIG. 76 (H)), and immediately thereafter, the first countdown effect image is displayed. When the number "0:00" shown in the figure is switched to the character "NEXT" (see FIGS. 76 (H) and (I)) and the character "NEXT" is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the pseudo connection is displayed. Before the effect is executed, the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76 (I) and 77 (A)).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the middle between the left 1 design and the right 1 design that were pseudo-stopped earlier. The second pseudo-sequential effect of pseudo-stopping the 7 symbols is performed (see FIG. 77 (A)). Then, in order to start the variation effect of the pseudo third station subsequent to the variation effect of the second pseudo station, the character “× 3” indicating the start of the variation effect of the third pseudo station is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a. After being displayed in large size, the character of “× 3” is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted accordingly (FIG. 77 (A ) And (B)).

  When the fluctuating effect of the pseudo third consecutive game is started, the held first countdown effect for the third time is immediately started. Therefore, as illustrated in FIGS. 77 (A) and 77 (B), the first countdown effect image indicating the number “29:71” is newly displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c, and The suggestion image corresponding to the third first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this way, when the third countdown effect is started along with the start of the pseudo-third variation effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down (see FIG. 77 (C)). . In this FIG. 77 (C), a state in which the reach is established with three symbols after the pseudo third consecutive variation effect is started, and the third first countdown effect is executed during the normal short reach is illustrated. Has been done.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) is set, the first countdown effect image is displayed during the first SP reach. The number shown reaches "0:00" (see FIG. 77 (D)), and immediately thereafter, the number "0:00" shown in the first countdown effect image is switched to the character "SPSP" (FIG. 77 ( See D) and (E)). Then, when the characters of "SPSP" are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the first countdown effect image is first displayed before the development gimmick effect that notifies the development to SPSP reach is executed. It is erased from the screen 7a (see FIGS. 77E and 77F). Then, the development gimmick effect described above based on FIG. 67 (L) or FIG. 69 (F) is executed (see FIG. 77 (F)), and when the SPSP reach is developed, the title display is performed in the early stage (FIG. 77). (See (G)). FIG. 77 (G) exemplifies a state in which a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (X battle) in which the player character battles with the enemy character X is displayed. When the SPSP reach is developed in this way, the first effect button operation promotion effect for generating the cut-in (see FIG. 77 (I)) is performed toward the end of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 77 (H)). The first effect button operation promotion effect and cut-in are as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (I) and FIGS. 70 (A) to (C).

(Characteristics of the first countdown effect)
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the first countdown effect. As illustrated in FIG. 78 (A), when the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches "0:00", immediately after that, the number "0:00" indicates execution of the pseudo continuous effect. When switching to the letters "NEXT", when the number "0:00" is switched to the letters "SPSP" which suggests the development to SPSP reach, and when the number "0:00" is switching to the SPSP reach X battle. There is a case where it switches to the character of "final battle" which suggests the development of.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78 (A), when the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "NEXT" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 6%. When the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "SPSP" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 30%. Further, when the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "final battle" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 55%.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a case where the first countdown effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is executed and a case where the first countdown effect that suggests the development to the SPSP reach is executed. There is a case where the first countdown effect that suggests the development of SPSP reach to the X battle is executed, and the case where the third first countdown effect is executed has the highest jackpot reliability and the second one. When the first countdown effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is next high. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while expecting that the characters "final battle" and "SPSP" will be displayed immediately after the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches "0:00". be able to.

  The timing of displaying the characters “NEXT”, “SPSP”, and “final battle” is not particularly limited, but the character “NEXT” is executed by the reach pre-pseudo-ren, for example. It is displayed at the timing immediately before the execution or immediately before the post-reach pseudo-execution is executed. Further, the characters of "SPSP" may be displayed at various timings, such as the timing immediately before the development gimmick effect is executed, the end of the normal long reach, the end of the first SP reach, and the end of the second SP reach. Further, the character "final battle" may be displayed, for example, after the development gimmick effect is performed and before the SPSP reach is developed.

  Although the first countdown effect that suggests the execution of another notice effect has been described so far, the number "0:00" shown in the first countdown effect image indicates that the jackpot such as "opportunity" or "super hot". There is a possibility that the game is executed, and the first countdown effect that changes to a character indicating how likely the possibility is is performed. Finally, the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that displays the characters "Opportunity" is about 8%, and finally the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that displays the characters "Gekiatsu" is about 71%. Is. Then, these characters are displayed, for example, at a timing immediately before the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is executed or at a predetermined timing during SPSP reach. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the characters "Gekiatsu" rather than "opportunity" will be displayed at these timings.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 78 (B), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect is executed once while the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state is performed once. In some cases, the first countdown effect is executed twice, and in some cases, the first countdown effect is executed three times as described above with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. The jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed once within the same fluctuation is about 7%, and the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed twice within the same fluctuation is about 14%. %, The jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same fluctuation is about 65%. In addition, when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same fluctuation, there is a characteristic that the development to the X battle, which has the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of SPSP reach, is concentrated.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the first countdown effect to be generated twice more within the same fluctuation when the first countdown effect is generated.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 76, by displaying the suggestion image suggesting that the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended on the second display screen 71a, the first countdown effect is not immediately executed. When the two first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, the jackpot reliability is about 20%, and when three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time (Fig. 76 (B ))) Jackpot reliability is about 69%. Then, when three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, the first countdown effects are executed three times within the same fluctuation, and in this case also, the development to the X battle is rich. become.

(Modifications regarding the first countdown effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the first countdown effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended, the suggestion image indicating that is displayed on the second display screen 71a has been described as an example, but in other embodiments. The suggestion image may be displayed on the first display screen 7a. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which a suggestion image is displayed in a region above the icon display region 9e on the first display screen 7a.

  Further, in FIGS. 76 (B) and (C), regarding the first countdown effect for the first time, the first countdown effect image showing the character “waiting” is displayed, and then the character “waiting” is changed to “8”. : 51 ”is switched to the number and then the first countdown effect is started. However, the first countdown effect is displayed when the first countdown effect image is displayed without displaying the characters“ standby ”. It may be started immediately.

  In addition, in FIGS. 76 and 77, with respect to the first countdown effect after the second time, the case where the execution thereof is not suspended (the character “waiting” is not displayed) is described as an example, but the first countdown after the second time is performed. Regarding the effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the execution of the first countdown effect can be suspended, as in the first countdown effect for the first time.

[First Concrete Example of Second Countdown Performance]
Next, a first specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Here, FIG. 79 is a screen view showing a first specific example of the second countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, a second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) showing a predetermined number on the first display screen 7a is displayed. There is a case where a second countdown effect for displaying and counting down the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is executed. When the second countdown effect is executed, a predetermined second suggestion effect indicating that the jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the second countdown effect.

  FIG. 79 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect design corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbols is started, the second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79). (See (B)). FIG. 79 (B) illustrates a state in which a large red number “5” is displayed as the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect.

  In this way, when the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is displayed, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is decreased by “1” in order of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1, and finally Indicates a number of "1" (see FIG. 79 (C)). Then, when about one second elapses after the second countdown effect image showing the number "1" is displayed, the first effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed ( See FIG. 79 (D). When the effective period of this first effect button operation promotion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 79D, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of this effective period are shown. Validity period gauge is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the pseudo second consecutive variable effect is started as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to this button operation. The character of “× 2” indicating that the character is displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the character of “storm mode” indicating that the production mode has shifted to the storm mode described later is the first character. No. 3 display screen 72a is displayed (see FIG. 79 (E)). Then, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (F), the character “× 2” is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted accordingly. Then, the variation effect of the second pseudo series is started.

  When the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect as the case (the operation-corresponding effect illustrated in FIG. 79 (E)) is performed.

[Second Specific Example of Second Countdown Performance]
Next, a second specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Here, FIG. 80 is a screen view showing a second specific example of the second countdown effect. FIG. 80 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect design corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbols is started, the second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 80). (See (B)). The initial value of the number shown in the second countdown effect image is fixed to "5", and a large red number "5" is shown in FIG. 80 (B), as in FIG. 79 (B). The state in which the second countdown effect image is displayed is illustrated.

  When the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is displayed in this way, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is "1", as in the first specific example described above with reference to FIG. The number gradually decreases, and finally the state becomes to show the number "1" (see FIG. 80 (C)). Then, when approximately one second elapses after the second countdown effect image showing the number "1" is displayed, the same first effect button operation promotion effect as in FIG. 79 (D) is performed (FIG. 80 (D). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the second countdown effect is executed again as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the button operation. The second countdown effect image showing the red number “5” that indicates “” is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (E)). In this way, when the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is displayed, the second countdown effect for the second time is performed (see FIGS. 80 (E) to (F)).

  After that, when the second countdown effect for the second time progresses and the number shown in the second countdown effect image becomes "1", immediately after that, the first time for the second time that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. An effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 80 (G)).

  On the other hand, if the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the second first effect button operation promotion effect, it suggests that the development destination selection effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The character "roulette chance" is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the same development destination selection effect as described above based on FIG. 69 (D) is performed (FIG. 80). (See (I)).

  When the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect as the case (the operation corresponding effect illustrated in FIG. 80 (H)) is performed.

[Comparison of countdown performance]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 74D to 74G), a first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76 and 77), and a second countdown effect (FIG. 79,). 80), the points of agreement and differences will be described. Here, FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the features of various countdown effects.

  When comparing the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect, the following can be said. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, in the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, a number (countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the first big chance notice is displayed in the icon display area 9e. It is displayed in the area immediately above (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, in the first countdown effect, a number (first countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c ( See FIG. 76 (C). On the other hand, in the second countdown effect, a number (second countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the second suggestion effect is executed is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (Fig. 79 ( See B)). In this way, when the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect are compared, the display areas in which the respective countdown effect images are displayed are different from each other.

  Further, the following can be said with respect to the number of digits of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown in the countdown effect image relating to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is a single-digit number (see FIGS. 74D to 74G). On the other hand, the numbers shown in the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect are three-digit or four-digit numbers (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). On the other hand, the number shown by the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is a one-digit number, like the number shown by the countdown effect image relating to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 79 (B)). . In this way, when the numbers indicated by the countdown effect images related to the respective countdown effects are compared, the numbers indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the numbers indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect. Are all single-digit numbers, the numbers of digits are different only in the numbers shown in the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect.

  Moreover, the following can be said about the number color of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number color of the numbers shown in the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is white (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, the number color of the number shown by the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect is yellow or red (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the number color of the number shown by the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is the same red color as one of the number colors of the numbers shown by the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)).

  The following can be said about the size of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown in the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 76 (B)) is the smallest, and the number shown in the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (FIG. 74 (D). ) Is medium in size, and the number shown in the second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) is the largest.

  The following can be said regarding the initial values of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown in the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect has an initial value fixed to “5” (FIG. 79 (B), FIG. 80 (B)). ), FIG. 80 (E)). On the other hand, the numbers shown in the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect have variable initial values (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). Further, the initial values of the numbers shown in the countdown effect image relating to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect are also variable.

  The following can be said about the countdown speed of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is decreased by "1" per second, and the countdown speed is unchanged. The number indicated by the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect also decreases by "1" per second, and the countdown speed remains unchanged. On the other hand, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect may be, for example, 1.3 seconds to decrease "1" or 0.7 seconds to decrease "1". The countdown speed is variable.

  The following can be said about the stock function of stocking the countdown effect of each countdown effect. That is, the first countdown effect may be executed twice within the same fluctuation, or may be executed three times within the same fluctuation. For the first countdown effect, execution of the first countdown effect is suspended and the first countdown effect is suspended. There is a function of stocking one countdown effect (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the second countdown effect do not have a function of holding the execution of the countdown effect and stocking the countdown effect.

(Effect of each countdown effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above three types of countdown effects are compared, the respective countdown effect images are displayed in different display areas, and when the countdown effects are finished, different suggestions are provided. A performance can be performed. Therefore, compared to the case where there is only one display area for the countdown effect image or the case where there is only one type of effect that is executed in response to the end of the countdown effect, there are more variations in the effect, and as a result, there is more interest. It is possible to execute a highly effective presentation.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the display mode (for example, display position, number of digits, number color, size of number) of the countdown effect images relating to each countdown effect is different from each other, so that, for example, the above three types of countdown effects Even if any two of the countdown effects are simultaneously executed, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the problem that the original effect cannot be obtained due to the player not being able to recognize that two types of countdown effects are being executed at the same time. .

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the speed of counting down the number indicated by the countdown effect image (or the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect) related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the second countdown effect related to the second countdown effect. 2 Countdown The speed at which the numbers shown in the effect image are counted down are different from each other. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the production becomes monotonous due to the countdown production being performed many times, and as a result, the interest of the production is deteriorated.

[About production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state will be described. Here, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for describing the effect mode in the low accurate low base state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 82, as the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, a plurality of normal modes, storm modes, large storm modes, rescue zones, and large chance effect generation zones are included. A production mode is prepared. In these effect modes, for example, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, the type of character displayed on the first display screen 7a, the variable effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the like are different from each other.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, normally, during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol in the low accurate low base state, the effect is executed in the normal mode. When the first special symbol hit determination is performed, as described above, the process of step S4505 of FIG. 52 for setting the variation effect pattern and the process of step S4506 of FIG. 52 for setting the notice effect pattern are performed. Then, based on the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination this time, and the result of these processes, whether or not to perform a mode transition effect for shifting the effect mode from the normal mode to another effect mode during the variable display of effect symbols In addition, which production mode to shift the production mode to when the mode transition production is performed is also determined. Then, based on the determination result related to these effect modes, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is controlled.

  The normal mode, storm mode, large storm mode, rescue zone, and large chance effect generation zone have the following features. That is, the normal mode is a basic effect mode and is a normal effect mode that does not suggest that there is a possibility of a big hit. On the other hand, the storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode by changing the effect mode from the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability Is set to about 15%. This storm mode is an effect mode that shifts with the execution of the simulated effect, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (E).

  It should be noted that FIG. 79 (E) exemplifies how the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode in association with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect performed at the final stage of the fluctuating effect of the first pseudo serial. In the case where the normal mode effect is executed until the end of the second variation production, and the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode in association with the execution of the pseudo production effect that is performed in the final stage of the pseudo second variation effect. There is also.

  In addition, there is a feature that the storm mode may shift to a large storm mode which is a higher mode (a storm mode) having a higher jackpot reliability than the storm mode. Specifically, for example, the production mode is changed from the normal mode along with the first pseudo-reproduction effect (indicating the development to the pseudo-second succession) is executed at the end of the pseudo first-revolution production. The mode changes from Arashi mode to Oarashi as the second pseudo-coordination performance is executed (indicating the development to the pseudo-third series) at the end of the pseudo-second fluctuation production, after transitioning to Arashi mode. A transition pattern for transitioning to the mode is given as an example.

  The big storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the big hit reliability is set to about 50%. Like the storm mode, this big storm mode is a production mode in which the execution of the pseudo continuous production is a transition trigger.As described above, in addition to the case of transitioning from the storm mode, the storm mode is switched from the normal mode to the storm mode. There is also a transition pattern that goes directly to the Storm Mode without doing so. Specifically, the production mode is changed from the normal mode to the great storm mode as the first pseudo-reproduction is performed (indicating the development to the pseudo-second succession) at the end of the pseudo-first continuous variation production. The transition mode from the normal mode to the transition pattern and the second pseudo continuous production (indicating the development to the pseudo third continuous) are executed at the end of the pseudo second continuous production. There is a transition pattern to transition to the great storm mode.

  The rescue zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal mode, and its jackpot reliability is set to about 25%. In this rescue zone, a transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the first pseudo continuous production (indicating the development to the pseudo second continuous) is executed at the end of the pseudo first continuous variation production, A transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the second pseudo continuous production is executed (indicating the development to the pseudo third continuous) at the end of the pseudo second continuous variation production, during the first SP reach (or During the second SP reach), a special pattern corresponding to the rescue zone is provided on the first display screen 7a, and a transition pattern for transitioning from the normal mode is prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the great storm mode, and a transition pattern for transitioning to the rescue zone upon the display of the special symbol is also prepared. There is. It should be noted that this rescue zone does not have an effect mode that is a higher-order mode of the rescue zone like the large storm mode with respect to the storm mode, and the big hit depending on the display mode of the effect image displayed on the third display screen 72a. There is a feature that the reliability changes. Specifically, when shifting to the rescue mode, a teammate character supporting the own character who battles with the enemy character is displayed on the third display screen 72a. If the background image of the teammate character is red, the jackpot reliability is high. Is about 23%, and when the background image of the teammate character is gold, the jackpot reliability is about 50%.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect of the rescue mode while paying attention to the background image of the teammate character displayed on the third display screen 72a in addition to the effect of the rescue zone performed on the first display screen 7a. Is possible.

  The large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal mode, and the big hit reliability is set to about 48%. When entering this large chance effect generation zone, there is a feature that it always develops into SPSP reach after that. In other words, there is a feature that the effect mode can be shifted to the large chance effect occurrence zone only when a variation effect pattern that develops from other reach effects with relatively low jackpot reliability to SPSP reach is set.

  Further, in the large chance effect generation zone, in the effect mode in which a dedicated stage effect is executed in the large chance effect occurrence zone, which can suggest that the above-described second large opportunity notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) is executed. There is a feature that, when the stage of stage production reaches the upper limit level MAX, the second large chance notice is executed (without fail) after that. Therefore, when the effect mode is shifted to the large chance occurrence zone, the player can enjoy the stage effect while expecting that the stage of the stage effect reaches the level MAX. A specific example of this stage effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Further, in the large chance effect generation zone, when the frame lamp 66 emits a gold color and a frame flash for outputting a predetermined sound effect is generated from the speaker 67 in the middle of the step effect, the step effect is ended. There is a feature that the second big chance notice will be issued (always) later.
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game machine moves to the large chance effect generation zone and the second large opportunity effect is subsequently executed, it is a stage effect that finally reaches the level MAX, or a stage effect. Either of the effects in which the frame flash <gold> is generated is executed in the middle.

  Also, when the stage effect of the large chance effect generation zone is being performed, a 5-digit number indicating the accumulation of points is displayed, and the fifth and fourth digits of this number finally show the same number. When it becomes, there is a feature that the hit notification effect is executed (always) thereafter.

[Specific example of production of large chance production zone]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, specific examples of effects in the large chance effect generation zone will be described. Here, FIGS. 83 and 84 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of effects related to the large chance effect generation zone.

  In FIG. 83 (A), the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the state in which the variable display of the effect design corresponding to the icon is started is illustrated. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbols is started, the same effect symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column, and reach is established (see FIG. 83 (B)). . After that, the first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 83 (C)). During the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83C, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period. The period gauge and the characters "press!" Indicating the contents of the operation performed by the player on the first effect button 63a are displayed.

  On the other hand, if the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the player is informed that the large chance effect generation zone is entered as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation. The characters of "Large chance effect occurrence zone" are displayed in large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (D)). When the player enters the large chance effect generation zone, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the SPSP reach is surely developed thereafter, so that the effect image forming the hold icon or the hold icon display area 9c is the first. 1 is deleted from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 83C and 83D).

  Next, an explanation effect is displayed in which the explanation sentence "Aim for level MAX by pressing and holding the button" showing the content of the mission that the player should perform in the large chance effect generation zone is displayed on the first display screen 7a (Fig. 83 (E)). Then, the first long press effect in the large chance effect generation zone is performed (see FIG. 83 (F)). When the effective period of the first long press effect starts, the third display screen 72a shows that the level 1 image showing that the level of the own character is level 1 and the level of the own character is level 2. The level 2 image shown, the level 3 image showing that the own character's level is level 3, and the level MAX image showing that the own character's level is level MAX are displayed. At the start, the level of the player character is the initial level 1, so that the level 1 image is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F).

  Also, during the effective period of the first long press effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F), a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period. From the period gauge, the character "long press!" Indicating the content of the operation that the player should perform on the first effect button 63a, and the five-digit number that increases according to the operation of the first effect button 63a. The composed point images are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 83 (F), the player long-presses the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first long-press effect, and points are given according to the number of enemy aircraft destroyed by the long-press. The state where 138 points are accumulated is illustrated. Further, in order to suggest that the zone is shifted to the large chance effect generation zone, the characters "large chance effect generation zone" are displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (F)). ).

  In addition, the numerical value indicated by the point image which is increased by long-pressing the first effect button 63a by the player and the level 1 image to the level MAX image have the following relationship. That is, when the number indicated by the point image is between "0" and "25000", the level 1 image is highlighted, and when the number indicated by the point image is between "25001" and "50000", the level 2 image is displayed. Is highlighted and the number indicated by the point image is between "50001" and "75000", the level 3 image is highlighted, and the number indicated by the point image is between "75001" and "99999". At times, there is a relationship that the level MAX image is highlighted.

  Next, when the effective period of the first long-press effect ends, a result effect that notifies the result of the long-press operation by the player during this effective period is performed (see FIG. 83 (G)). Specifically, as a result of the player long pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached "38000", and this number is level 2 Since it has a value between “25001” and “50000” corresponding to, the word “Level 2 reached!” Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to inform that the level 2 has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 83 (G)).

  In this way, when the result effect for the first long press effect is performed, the second long press effect is performed (see FIG. 83 (H)). During the effective period of the second long-press effect, the same effect display as that during the effective period of the first long-press effect is displayed. The point that the number indicated by the point image has reached "39138" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the player character is level 2 according to the pressing and holding of the first effect button 63a for the first pressing and holding effect. Since the level 2 image is highlighted instead of the level 1 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the first long press effect is displayed (FIG. 83 ( F) and (H)).

  Next, when the effective period of the second long-press effect ends, a result effect of notifying the result of the long-press operation by the player during this effective period is performed (see FIG. 83 (I)). Specifically, as a result of the player long-pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the second long-press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached “64000”, and this number is level 3 Since it has a value between “50001” and “75000” corresponding to, the word “Level 3 reached!” Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to notify that the level 3 has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 83 (I)).

  In this way, when the result effect for the second long press effect is performed, the third long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (A)). During the effective period of the third long press effect, the same effect display as during the effective period of the second long press effect is displayed, but here, the first effect during the effective period of the third long press effect is displayed. The point that the number indicated by the point image has reached "76328" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the player character is level 3 according to the pressing and holding of the first effect button 63a for the second pressing and holding effect. Since the level 3 image is highlighted instead of the level 2 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the second long press effect is displayed (FIG. 83 ( H) and FIG. 84 (A)).

  Next, when the effective period of the third long-press effect ends, a result effect is performed to notify the result of the long-press operation by the player during this effective period (see FIG. 84 (B)). Specifically, as a result of the player long pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the third long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached "76328", and this number is the level MAX. Since it has a value between "75001" and "99999" corresponding to, the word "Level MAX reached!" Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to notify that the level MAX has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 84 (B)).

  In this way, when the result effect for the third long press effect is performed, the fourth long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (C)). During the effective period of the fourth long-press effect, the same effect display as during the effective period of the third long-press effect is displayed, but here, the first effect during the effective period of the fourth long-press effect is displayed. The point that the number indicated by the point image has reached "99641" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the player character is level MAX according to the pressing and holding of the first effect button 63a for the third pressing and holding effect. Since the level MAX image is highlighted instead of the level 3 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the third long press effect is displayed (FIG. 84 ( See A) and (C)).

  Next, when the effective period of the fourth long press effect ends, the fifth digit and the fourth digit of the number indicated by the point image show the same numerical value at this point (see FIG. 84 (C)). It is a big hit at this point.

  It is suggested that the level of your character has reached the level MAX during the effective period of the fourth long press effect, and that the level MAX image is highlighted to give the second big chance notice. Therefore, the advanced gimmick effect described above with reference to FIG. 69 (F) is performed at the timing when the effective period of the fourth long press effect ends (see FIG. 84 (D)). Then, since the level of the own character has reached the level MAX, following the advanced gimmick effect, the above-mentioned second large chance notice based on FIG. 69 (G) is executed (see FIG. 84 (E)). .

  After that, in the early stage of SPSP reach, a title display for notifying that the SPSP reach has developed is displayed (see FIG. 84 (F)), and when the end of SPSP reach is reached, the cut-in of FIG. 84 (H) occurs. A first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 84 (G)) for performing the operation is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the effect of the large chance effect generation zone, a step effect that can be gradually expanded to any one of 4 steps or less with the upper limit of 4 steps is executed, and the upper limit is set. It is possible to give notice that the second big chance notice will be executed after that by executing the stage effect that develops to the four stages (the level of the own character reaches the level MAX). In addition, when the second large chance notice is executed later, a stage effect that develops up to the upper limit of four stages and ends is executed, while when the second large chance notice is not executed later, four stages are executed. A stage effect that develops to the stage below and ends is executed.

  It should be noted that this large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode in which the jackpot reliability is extremely high at about 48%, so that it is assumed that the player finally performs a step effect that develops to less than four steps. Also, it is possible to enjoy the game without lowering the expectation that the hit notification effect will be executed.

(Effect of the production in the large chance production zone)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the large chance effect occurrence zone is also set. There may be a case where the second big chance announcement is executed in advance depending on the stage effect performed in (2). Therefore, by executing the effect in the large chance effect generation zone, it is possible to increase not only the player's expectation for the jackpot but also the expectation for the occurrence of the second large chance notice. As a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the stage effect that develops to the fourth stage and ends in the large chance effect generation zone is executed, the second large chance notice is (necessarily) executed. For this reason, it is possible to expect a player who expects that the second big chance announcement will be executed to develop the stage production to the fourth stage, and a synergistic effect of the stage production and the second big chance announcement. Thus, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

[About group notice]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a possibility suggesting effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed during the variation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state, "group notice" There is a case in which a notice effect called is executed. This group announcement is a moving effect in which a plurality of characters move in a predetermined direction on the first display screen 7a. Along with this moving effect, a predetermined effect sound that effects the movement of the plurality of characters is output from the speaker 67. To be done.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment uses, as the group notice, a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters move leftward on the first display screen 7a, and a large number of first notices. It is possible to execute the second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which the two characters move to the right on the first display screen 7a.

<Specific example of first group notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the first group notice will be described with reference to FIG. 85. Here, FIG. 85 is a screen view showing a specific example of the first group notice. In FIG. 85 (A), in a state where the icon (green icon) whose display color is green is displayed in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a, the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the green icon The state is shown immediately after the second simulated effect (pre-reach simulated effect) is executed during display and the variation effect of the pseudo third effect is started. In this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the pseudo third series, first, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 85 (B)), and then left. The right symbol (for example, 3 symbols) which is the same as the symbol is pseudo stopped and the reach is established (see FIG. 85 (C)).

  Then, immediately after the reach is established in this way, the first group notice is given (see FIGS. 85 (D) to (F) and 85 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display showing that a large number of first characters appear from the right end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the left end is displayed, and at the same time, the first group notice that effects the movement of the plurality of first characters. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 85D to 85F, an icon targeting the icon between the start and the end of the first group notice. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), the icon change effect for the icon is between the start and the end of the first group notice. It may be done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the first group notice.

<About icon change production>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball in the first starting opening 20 in a situation where the special symbol validity judgment and the variable display of the special symbol cannot be immediately started during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. When a prize is won, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is held is reserved with a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) as an upper limit. Then, when the right of the first special symbol hit determination is held in this way, the same number of hold icons as the hold number of the first special symbol hit determination is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. In each screen diagram of FIG. 85, in order to suggest that the number of reservations for the first special symbol winning / disapproving judgment is “1”, a state where one holding icon is displayed in the holding icon display area 9c is illustrated. There is.

  By the way, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white and circular hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 85 (A)). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, there is an icon change effect in which the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the color and / or the shape of the hold icon) changes. It may be done.

  FIG. 86 exemplifies the hold icon, the type of icon that can be the icon, the display mode of the icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. When the icon change effect for the hold icon is performed, for example, a white hold icon (white icon), a blue hold icon (blue icon), a green hold icon (green icon), a red hold icon ( The red icon), the golden hold icon (gold icon), and the iridescent hold icon (rainbow icon) are changed to hold icons of display colors that suggest the jackpot reliability. In the present embodiment, the white icon does not indicate the jackpot reliability, the blue icon jackpot reliability is set to about 1%, the green icon jackpot reliability is set to about 5%, and the red icon jackpot. The reliability is set to about 30%, the jackpot reliability of the gold icon is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, other than the case where the icon change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed only once for the one hold icon that is determined to execute the icon change effect. In some cases, an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon may be performed multiple times. Specifically, for example, when one hold icon, which is the object of the icon change effect, is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the icon change effect of changing the hold icon from the white icon to the blue icon is performed. After that, the hold icon may be changed from the blue icon to the red icon, and the icon change effect may be performed a plurality of times for one hold icon. In addition, when the hold icon starts to be displayed as an icon (for example, a blue icon) other than the white icon from the beginning, or when the hold icon that starts to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon is targeted, one or more icon change effects are performed. You may be told.

  Further, when the hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e, the icon change effect of changing the display mode of the icon is 1 or It may be performed multiple times. Here, when the hold icon and the icon are compared with respect to the icon change effect, the two have the following coincidences / differences. That is, there is a coincidence that both the hold icon and the icon can be changed to the blue icon, the green icon, the red icon, the gold icon, and the rainbow icon illustrated in FIG. 86. On the other hand, the icon can be changed to the green flight icon, the red flight icon, the gold flight icon, and the rainbow flight icon illustrated in FIG. 86, while the hold icon is changed to these flight icons. There is a difference between the two in that they do not get.

  Here, the flight icon is an icon simulating a vehicle capable of flying, the green flight icon is a green icon simulating a helicopter, the red flight icon is a red icon simulating a propeller plane, and the gold flight icon is large. The golden icon that mimics the passenger plane, and the rainbow flight icon is a rainbow icon that imitates a spaceship. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the green flying icon is set to about 25%, the jackpot reliability of the red flying icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flying icon is set to about 78%. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow flight icon is set to 100%.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the icon change effect for the icon, for example, the icon change effect in which the icon changes from the white icon to the green icon, the icon There may be an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a green icon, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a green icon to a rainbow icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a gold icon. Further, the icon is initially displayed as a non-flying icon in the icon display area 9e, and as an icon change effect for the icon, for example, the icon is changed from a green icon to a flying icon. An icon change effect of changing to a green flight icon, an icon change effect of changing the icon from a red icon to a red flight icon, and an icon change effect of changing the icon from a red flight icon to a gold flight icon are performed.

  When the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the hold icon is subjected to an icon change effect one or more times, and the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e to be used as the icon. When the icon is displayed, the icon change effect is performed once or a plurality of times with respect to the icon, and the icon change effect is applied to both the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e with respect to one icon. May be performed.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning is notified by the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) which is a highly reliable reach production, the second production button operation promotion production at the final stage of the SPSP reach. And the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b for the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 70). Then, a normal short reach (refer to FIG. 67 (F)), a normal long reach (refer to FIG. 67 (H)), and a first SP reach (refer to FIG. 67 (I)), which are less reliable reach effects than SPSP reach. , In the case of notifying the win by any of the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)), a configuration is adopted in which the hit notification effect is executed regardless of the operation of the second effect button 63b by the player. ing.

  Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a result of the icon change effect targeting the icon, the icon is one of a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, and a rainbow flight icon. When the flying icon is changed to a flying icon, a button image change effect (see FIGS. 89 and 90) in which the flying icon changes to the second effect button image used for the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed. Has been adopted.

  Therefore, by changing the icon to any one of the four types of flying icons illustrated in FIG. 86 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the SPSP reach is finally developed and the winning is notified. It is possible for the player to recognize that it is done, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big hit.

  On the other hand, if the icon change effect is performed to change the hold icon to any of the above four types of flying icons, the reach effect finally becomes SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Since the player can recognize the flow of the reach production such as the development from a fairly early stage, it is possible that the interest of the reach production is deteriorated on the contrary. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, a configuration is adopted in which the icon can be changed to a flight icon, while the hold icon cannot be changed to a flight icon. ing.

(About pre-judgment processing)
Next, a pre-determination process for realizing an icon change effect for an icon (hold icon or the icon) will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol hit determination is suspended, prior to the first special symbol hit determination is performed, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. A determination process may be performed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a random number for determining special symbol hit / miss in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 20, and based on the random number for determining special symbol hit / miss, the first Do the same win / fail judgment process prior to the first special symbol hit / miss judgment process that is performed at the start of variation of the special symbol, and if the first special symbol hit / miss judgment process is executed, it will be judged as a "big hit" Determine in advance whether or not. Further, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the special symbol appropriateness determination random number, it is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected when the first special symbol appropriateness determination is executed.

  In this way, the game control microcomputer 81, when the pre-judgment processing is performed in response to the right of the first special symbol winning / discarding judgment being reserved, the special figure 1 starting entry command including the pre-judging result It is transmitted to the control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the above-described icon change effect, based on the pre-determination result included in the special figure 1 starting ball entry command. To do. Then, when it is determined to execute the icon change effect, it is determined in what change pattern the icon (holding icon or the icon) display mode is changed, and the icon change effect based on the determination result is displayed on the image control board 100. To run.

(Regarding the icon change effect accompanying the first group notice)
When it is determined to execute the icon change effect for the icon, a change pattern for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined immediately after the reach is established. Specifically, for example, a change pattern may be determined in which the green icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e is changed to the gold icon immediately after the reach is established. On the other hand, when the notice effect pattern for giving the first group notice is set by the notice effect setting process of step S4506 (see FIG. 52) performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon There is.

  In this way, immediately after the reach is established, the execution of the icon change effect of the change pattern for changing the icon from the green icon to the gold icon is instructed, and the notice in the notice effect pattern is executed in which the first group notice is executed immediately after the reach is established. When the variable effect start command for instructing execution of the effect is transmitted to the image control board 100, the icon changes from the green icon to the gold icon during the period from the start of the first group notice immediately after the reach is established to the end. (See FIGS. 85 (G) to (I)).

  On the other hand, immediately after the reach is established, the execution of the icon change effect that changes the icon from the green icon to another icon is not instructed, and the first-group notice is executed immediately after the reach is established. When the variation effect start command instructing is transmitted to the image control board 100, immediately after the reach is established, the first group notice is given without the icon change effect of the icon (FIG. 85 (D)). (See (F)).

  In the above description, the case where the first group notice is given immediately after the reach is established has been described as an example, but the second group notice may be given immediately after the reach is established.

<Specific example of second group notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the second group notice will be described with reference to FIG. 87. Here, FIG. 87 is a screen view showing a specific example of the second group notice. In FIG. 87 (A), the above-described advanced gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is performed in a state where a red icon is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. The situation is illustrated. When this advanced gimmick effect is performed, the player is expected to expect the above-mentioned second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M) and FIG. 69 (G)) to reach the black background image. A darkening effect is performed in which only the symbols (for example, 5 symbols on the left and 5 symbols on the right) and the icon are displayed and the other effect images are hidden (see FIG. 87 (B)).

  When this darkening effect is performed, the second big chance notice may be given subsequently. However, if the second big chance notice is not given, following the darkening action, a battle with an enemy character is performed in SPSP reach. An own character appearance effect is performed in which an effect display is displayed that shows the appearance of the own character to be performed (see FIG. 87 (C)).

  Immediately after this own character appearance effect is performed, the second group notice is given (see FIGS. 87 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 87 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display is displayed that shows a large number of second characters appearing from the left end of the first display screen 7a and running away to the right end, and at the same time, a second group notice that effects the movement of the plurality of second characters. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 87D to 87F, an icon targeting the icon between the start and the end of the second group notice. When no change effect is performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (G) to (I), the icon change effect for the icon is between the start and the end of the second group notice. It may be done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the second group notice. It is to be noted that FIGS. 87 (G) to (I) exemplify how the icon changes from a red icon to a gold flying icon during the second group notice.

  In this way, the group notice may be given immediately before the SPSP reach is started, not only immediately after the reach is established. In addition, the case where the second group notice is given immediately before the SPSP reach is started has been described as an example based on FIG. 87, but the first group notice may be given just before the SPSP reach is started. Further, the group notice can be executed not only after the reach is established or immediately before the SPSP reach is started, but also immediately before the first SP reach is started or just before the second SP reach is started, for example. However, multiple group announcements will not be given within the same fluctuation.

(Features regarding group notice)
As is clear from the description up to this point based on FIGS. It is possible to change from the second display mode (which suggests that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than the first display mode).

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (D) to (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the first group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I). , The icon has changed from the green icon (jackpot reliability: about 5%) to the gold icon (jackpot reliability: about 75%) during the first group notice. In the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (D) to (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the second group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (G) to (I). , The icon has changed from the red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to the gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%) during the second group notice.

  As is clear from these, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon changes from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first group notice (or the second group notice). The first case (see FIGS. 85 (G) to (I) and FIG. 87 (G) to (I)) and the second case not changing (FIGS. 85 (D) to (F) and 87 (D)) (See (F)), there is a feature that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the first case than in the second case.

(Reliability of jackpot of group notice)
Next, the jackpot reliability of the group announcement will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Here, FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of each group announcement. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the four types of group announcements illustrated in FIG. 88. Here, the first group notice is a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters appear, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 45%. The second group notice is a second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which a large number of second characters (different from the first character) appear, and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is the first group notice. The same is set to about 45%.

  In the third group notice (third group notice), immediately after a large number of first characters have moved to the left, a special character (for example, an own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow the first characters. It is a group notice that the effect display that moves will be displayed. That is, the first group notice is a group notice of the effect pattern in which the first character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the third group notice is the first notice in the plurality of characters. The two are different in that they are group announcements of effect patterns including both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the third group announcement is set to 100% in this embodiment.

  In the fourth group notice (fourth group notice), immediately after a large number of second characters have moved to the right, a special character (for example, an own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow the second characters. It is a group notice that the effect display that moves will be displayed. That is, the second group notice is a group notice of the effect pattern in which the second character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the fourth group notice is the second notice in the plurality of characters. The two are different in that they are group announcements of effect patterns including both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the fourth group announcement is set to 100% in this embodiment.

  In this way, it is clear from the fact that the jackpot reliability of the first group notice and the second group notice is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the third group notice and the fourth group notice is set to 100%. As described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute four types of group notices of the first group notice to the fourth group notice when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 81 to execute the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 81 determines that the jackpot game is not to be executed by the game control microcomputer 81, the first group notice and the second group notice can be executed, but the third group notice is possible. The group notice and the fourth group notice cannot be executed.

  The execution control of such a group announcement can be realized by the following configuration, for example. In the ROM configuring the effect control microcomputer 91, a group notice execution determination table for determining whether or not to execute the group notice is stored. In this group announcement execution determination table, a random number is associated with each of the big hits and the loses, and more random numbers are associated with the big hits than the loses. Further, the ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a hit group notice selection table and a loss group notice selection table for selecting the type when it is decided to execute the group notice. In the hit group notice selection table, a random number value is associated with each of the four types of group notices, that is, the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, in the group notice selection table for loss, random numbers are not associated with the third group notice and the fourth group notice among the first group notice to the fourth group notice, and the first group notice and the second group notice. A random number value is associated with the group announcement.

  The production control microcomputer 91, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a group notice execution determination random number for determining whether to execute the group notice or a group notice selection for selecting the type of the group notice. A random number updating process for updating various effect random numbers for determining an effect pattern such as a random number is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the production control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command relating to the first special symbol hit determination, with respect to the group announcement execution determination random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update processing, the time when the variation start command is received from the main control board 80. The count value of is acquired as the group announcement execution determination random number. Similarly, regarding the group announcement selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number updating process, the count value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 is acquired as the group announcement selection random number.

  Next, production control microcomputer 91, if the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination is "big hit", the acquired group advance notice execution determination Whether or not to execute the group notice is determined based on whether or not the random number matches any of the random number values associated with the jackpots in the group notice execution determination table. On the other hand, when the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination is “miss”, the acquired group announcement execution determination random number is the group announcement execution determination table. It is determined whether or not to execute the group notice based on whether or not any of the random number values associated with the loss matches with.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination is “big hit” in the received variation start command, and when it is determined to execute the group notice, , The group notice selection random number acquired when the variation start command is received is a random number value associated with any group notice of the first group notice to the fourth group notice specified in the winning group notice selection table. One of the first group notice to the fourth group notice is selected based on whether they match. On the other hand, the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol winning / disapproving determination is “miss”, and when it is determined to execute the group notice, the variation start command is received. Based on whether the group notice selection random number acquired at that time matches the random number value associated with which group notice of the first group notice to the second group notice specified in the group notice selection table for loss Select the first group notice or the second group notice.

  As is clear from the above description, in the hit group notice selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is "big hit", the first group notice to the fourth group notice Since a random number value is associated with each of them, it is possible to execute any of the group notices from the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, in the group notice selection table for loss referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is “miss”, a random number value is associated with the first group notice and the second group notice. However, the random numbers are not associated with the third group announcement and the fourth group announcement. Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment this time is “miss”, the first group notice or the second group notice can be executed, while the third group notice and the fourth group notice are possible. Execution of advance notice is restricted.

  In this way, the third group notice and the fourth group notice can be selected when the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is "big hit", while it is selected when "miss". Since it is not performed, the jackpot becomes rich when the notice of the third group or the notice of the fourth group appears.

(Action effect by group notice)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect for changing the display mode of the icon from the first display mode to the second display mode may be executed as the group notice is executed. . For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, by the synergistic effect of the group notice and the icon change effect for the icon, and as a result, A high performance effect can be obtained.

  Further, when the first group notice is executed (see, for example, FIG. 85), the icon is changed from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%) during the first group notice. The jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the icon changes from the green icon during the first group notice. Further, when the second group notice is executed (see, for example, FIG. 87), during the second group notice, the icon changes from a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to a gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%). ), It is easier to execute the jackpot game than the case where the icon does not change from the red icon during the second group notice. In this way, when the display mode of the icon changes with the group notice, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than when it does not change, and the group notice also allows the player to pay attention to the icon. Since it is possible to make it possible, it is possible to obtain a higher effect as compared with the case of executing the icon change effect for the icon regardless of the group notice.

  In addition, the first group notice and the second group notice can be executed regardless of the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination, while the third group notice and the fourth group notice are the first special symbol hit or not. It can be executed only when the determination result of the determination is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the third group notice and the fourth group notice to be executed rather than the first group notice and the second group notice, and the first group notice and the second group notice as the group notice. As compared with the case where only the group notice is prepared, it is possible to execute the group notice that has a lot of variations of the effects and is more interesting.

(Modifications regarding group notice)
The following configuration may be adopted for the group notice.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the group notice can be executed at various timings after the reach is established during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state has been described, but in the other embodiments, You may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a group notice before the reach establishment in the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol in a low probability low base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display mode of the icon is changed from the start to the end of the group notice is described, but, for example, the display mode of the icon is changed immediately before the group notice is started. Change, change the display mode of the icon at the same time when the group notice starts, change the display mode of the icon at the same time when the group notice ends, or change the display mode of the icon immediately after the group notice ends You may let me do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold icon cannot be changed to the flight icon while the icon can be changed to the flight icon has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the hold icon is changed to the flight icon. You may employ | adopt the structure which can perform the icon change production which changes.

  In addition, here, the case where the possibility suggesting effect is a group announcement is described as an example, but the possibility suggesting effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed, except for the group announcement. May be directed. That is, the possibility suggesting effect may be, for example, a first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) or a second big chance notice (see FIG. 69 (G)). In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during the advance notice of the first large chance, or the display mode of the icon is changed during the advance notice of the second large opportunity. . The possibility suggesting effect may be SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect. In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during SPSP reach. Further, the possibility suggesting effect may be a pseudo consecutive effect (see FIG. 79 (E)) that suggests a transition to the storm mode, and the display mode of the icon may be changed in accordance with the pseudo consecutive effect. Good. Further, the possibility suggestion effect may be a notification effect (see FIG. 83D) for notifying the entry into the large chance effect generation zone, and the display mode of the icon may be changed during the notification effect. Good.

[About button image change effect]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach which is a highly reliable reach production is developed and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the first production button operation promotion production (FIG. 69 (I ) Is performed and the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, a cut-in (see FIGS. 70A to 70C) occurs. Then, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70 (D) to (F)) is performed thereafter, and the player presses the second effect button 63b during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed.

  Note that, as is clear from the notations of FIGS. 69 (H) to (I) and the notation of FIG. 70, when the start timing of the second effect button operation promotion effect is reached while the icon other than the flying icon is displayed. While the icon is still displayed, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a regardless of the icon. The operation promotion image here is, specifically, a second effect button image simulating the second effect button 63b, a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "Press!", And the remaining time of the effective period. It is a validity period gauge indicating.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the icon has changed to a flying icon by the time the second effect button operation promotion effect in the final stage of the SPSP reach is started, that icon is changed. There is a feature that a button image change effect is performed in which the button image change effect is performed which is moved from the icon display area 9e and is changed into an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the second effect button 63b (see FIGS. 89 and 90).

<First specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 89 is a screen view showing a first specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89 (A), with the gold flight icon displayed in the icon display area 9e, a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (C battle) in which the player character battles with the enemy character C is displayed. It is illustrated that it is being broken. When the SPSP reach is started and the end of the SPSP reach is thus reached, the above-described first effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 89 (B)). Specifically, in the state where the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e, the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective. An expiration date gauge showing time is displayed.

  When this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period, or at the timing when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 89 (C)). FIG. 89 (C) exemplifies a state in which the gold cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. There is the following relationship between the icon displayed in and the cut-in generated in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect.

  That is, when the icon is changed to the red flying icon or the gold flying icon before the SPSP reach is developed, the red cut-in is performed according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. Alternatively, there is a relationship that a gold cut-in occurs and a green cut-in does not occur. As described above with reference to FIG. 86, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the red flying icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flying icon is set to about 78%. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in is set to about 7% (see FIG. 71), and if the green cut-in is generated while the red flying icon or the gold flying icon is displayed, Not only may the player's expectation for the jackpot be significantly reduced, but also the effect of the effect of displaying the red flight icon or the gold flight icon as the icon may be significantly reduced. And, these things may lead to a decrease in the motivation of the player who operates the second effect button 63b for the second effect button operation promotion effect performed after the cut-in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the icon changes to the red flying icon or the gold flying icon before the SPSP reach development, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. , The above-mentioned configuration of generating a cut-in of red or higher (not generating a green cut-in) is adopted.

  On the other hand, if the icon changes to a rainbow flying icon (the jackpot reliability is 100%) before the SPSP reach develops, the jackpot becomes rich when the rainbow flying icon is displayed. Green cut-in, red cut-in, or gold cut-in occurs according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the button operation promotion effect.

  Further, when the SPSP reach is developed with the icon different from the flying icon being displayed, the red cut-in or the gold cut-in is performed depending on the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. If it occurs, then there is a relationship that the icon changes to a flying icon of a red flying icon or more. That is, as the icon, for example, a red icon (big hit reliability: about 56%) or a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) is displayed. When a gold cut-in (big hit reliability: about 81%) occurs, after the cut-in occurs, an icon change effect in which the icon changes to a flying icon other than the green flying icon is performed. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 89, if a gold cut-in (or red cut-in) occurs with the gold flight icon displayed as the icon, prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 89 (H)). , Button image change effect is performed (see FIGS. 89D to 89H). Specifically, a representation that the gold flight icon moves from the icon display area 9e to the right and then turns in the sky to move the gold flight icon to the center of the first display screen 7a. Display is performed (see FIGS. 89D to 89F). Then, when the gold flight icon moves to the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, an effect display (deformation action) is displayed in which the gold flight icon is broken into two and deformed into the second effect button image. Here, the button image change effect in which the gold flight icon changes to the second effect button image has been described as an example, but when the green flight icon, the red flight icon, or the rainbow flight icon is displayed as the icon. Also, the same button image change effect is performed.

  By the way, when the button image change effect for moving the flying icon from the icon display area 9e is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is hidden, and as a result, the button image change effect is performed. After playing, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to visually recognize the display color of the icon. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to prevent this problem from occurring.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect. The second effect button image that configures and the character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b, which is "press!", Is displayed in the same color as the flight icon. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, when the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, when the gold fly icon deformation action is completed, the gold color is displayed. No. 2 effect button image and a gold character "Push!" Are displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)).

  If the color of the effective period gauge related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is changed in accordance with the color of the flying icon, the visibility of the effective period gauge deteriorates in relation to the display color of the background image. As a result, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the remaining time of the valid period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the second effect button image and the character indicating the operation content are displayed in the same color as the flight icon, while the effective period gauge is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) regardless of the display color of the flight icon. It is supposed to be displayed using.

  In this way, when the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)) and the second effect button 63b is operated within the valid period, the winning notification effect is performed. (Refer to FIG. 89 (see FIG. 89 (I)). Specifically, a hit notification effect in which three effect symbols forming a doublet are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped, or three effect symbols forming a reach-missing eye. A loss notification effect is performed in which the pseudo stop is performed and then the main stop is performed.

<Second specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 90 is a screen view showing a second specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89, the case where the flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e before the SPSP reach is developed has been described as an example, but here, a state in which the flying icon different from the flying icon (for example, a red icon) is displayed. The button image change effect performed when the SPSP reach is developed will be described.

  In FIG. 90 (A), in the state where the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e, a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (B battle) in which the player character battles with the enemy character B is displayed. The situation is illustrated. When the SPSP reach is started and the end of the SPSP reach is thus reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 89 (B) (see FIG. 90 (B)). ).

  When this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period, or at the timing when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 90 (C)). FIG. 90C illustrates a state in which red cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the SPSP reach is developed in a state where the icon different from the flight icon is displayed, and the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect is generated. When the red cut-in or the gold cut-in occurs according to the operation of, the icon is changed to a flight icon of a red flight icon or higher after that. Therefore, when a red cut-in (or a gold cut-in) occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a, immediately after that, an icon change effect that changes the icon from a non-flying icon to a flying icon is performed. . Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 90D to 90E, a lightning strike directly hits the red icon as the icon, and the energy changes the icon from the red icon to the red flying icon. An icon change effect representing a changing state is performed.

  90D to 90E illustrate a state in which the icon changes from a red icon to a red flying icon (which has a higher jackpot reliability), but the icon changes from a red icon to a gold flying icon. There are also cases where the icon changes or the icon changes from a red icon to a rainbow flight icon. Further, when the green icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a flight icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the green icon, that is, a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, or a rainbow flight icon. Further, when the gold icon is displayed as the icon, it changes to a gold flight icon or a rainbow flight icon, which is a flight icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the gold icon.

  In this way, the icon that is not the flight icon changes to any of the plurality of flight icons that have a higher jackpot reliability than the icon.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 90, when the icon changes from the red icon to the red flying icon, the button image change effect is performed using the red flying icon (see FIGS. 90 (F) to (I)). This button image change effect is the same effect as the button image change effect described above with reference to FIGS. 89 (D) to (H), but specifically, the red flying icon is moved rightward from the icon display area 9e. After moving to, the effect is displayed by turning in the sky and moving the red flying icon to the center of the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 90F to 90H). Although not shown in FIG. 90, when the red flying icon moves to the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, the red flying icon splits into two and is transformed into a second rendering button image. (Transformation action) is performed.

  In this way, when the button image change effect of changing the red flying icon to the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed, the red second effect button image and “press! The red character "" is displayed (see FIG. 90 (I)). When the second effect button 63b is operated within the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three notification symbols forming the double stitches are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped, or reach loss. A loss notification effect is performed in which the three effect symbols forming the eyes are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped.

(Action effect by changing button image)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a button image change effect in which the icon changes to an operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the icon has both the function of suggesting that the first special symbol is being variably displayed and the function of changing to the operation promoting image, and effectively brings out the entertainment of the effect using the icon. It is possible to improve.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, while the button image change effect can be executed during the SPSP reach, it is possible to perform the normal short reach, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach performed before the SPSP reach is developed. The feature is that the button image change effect is not executed during the reach effect of reliability. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for developing SPSP reach, as compared with the case where the button image change effect is not executed during SPSP reach.

  Further, before the SPSP reach is developed, both the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 68, for example. On the other hand, during SPSP reach, in the state where the hold icon is displayed on the first display screen 7a without displaying the hold icon (see, for example, FIGS. 89 and 90), this icon becomes the operation promotion image. A changing button image change effect is performed. Therefore, compared to the case where the hold icon is displayed during SPSP reach, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the icon, for example, because the player pays attention to the hold icon. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the image change effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed after the button image change effect is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e before the button image change effect is performed. A second effect button image of the same color as is displayed on the first display screen 7a in a size that suggests the jackpot reliability (see FIGS. 71, 89 (H), 90 (I)). Therefore, the player can grasp what the jackpot reliability is based on the size of the second effect button image, and the button image change effect based on the display color of the second effect button image. It is possible to grasp the display color of the icon (flying icon) before the operation is performed.

(Modifications related to button image change effect)
The following configurations may be adopted for the button image change effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, in response to the operation of the second effect button 63b while the operation promotion image (second effect button image) in which the icon is changed is displayed, the winning notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. Although the case has been described, in another embodiment, for example, cut-in may be performed as the operation corresponding effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon is changed to the second effect button image as the operation promotion image has been described, but in another embodiment, the icon is changed to the first effect button image and the first effect button image is changed. The operation-based effect may be performed in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a while the effect button image is being displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the button image change effect is not executed during the reach effect other than the SPSP reach. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a configuration capable of executing the button image change effect during the reach effect other than the SPSP reach such as the first SP reach or the second SP reach may be adopted.

[Special reach production]
Although not shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the normal long reach develops into a special reach effect, or when the SPSP reach develops, a special reach effect develops. . This special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 93) is a reach effect that causes the player to operate the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b. During the special reach effect, four effective periods in which the player operates the first effect button 63a and one effective period in which the player operates the second effect button 63b are set. Then, the display mode of the possibility suggesting image suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is updated every time the first effect button 63a is operated in each of the four effective periods, The jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display mode of the sex suggestion image, and thereafter, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the one effective period. Be seen.

<Specific example of special reach production>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the special reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 91 to 93 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the special reach effect. FIG. 91 (A) exemplifies a state in which the above-described normal long reach is being performed (based on FIG. 69 (B) and the like) with the red icon displayed as the icon. Here, when the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal ring reach to the special reach effect is set at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time, the following effect is performed.

  That is, first, in order to pretend that the loss notification effect is to be performed in the normal long reach, for example, similar loss effect in which three effect symbols forming a reach loss pattern such as "565" are displayed in a pseudo stop manner (Fig. 91 (B )reference). Then, an effect image including the three effect patterns forming these reach eyes is reduced and displayed, and the effect effect of rotating this effect image in the clockwise direction is performed (see FIGS. 91C to 91D). The development production includes a success production that succeeds in the development of the special reach production and a failure production that fails in the development of the special reach production.

  Although not shown in the figure, when a variable effect pattern is set that performs a failure notification at the end of normal long reach and then performs a loss notification effect, the reduced image does not rotate clockwise and the original While returning to the posture, the size of the three effect symbols included in the reduced image is returned to the original size, and the failure effect is performed, and the three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

  On the other hand, when a variation effect pattern that develops from normal long reach to special reach effect via success effect is set, a state in which the reduced image rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) or more is displayed. A successful production is performed. When this success effect is performed, the title display related to the special reach effect such as "reliability increase chance" is performed (see FIG. 91 (E)). Then, following this title display, an explanation effect is displayed in which a message explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as "press the button to raise the reliability!", Is displayed on the first display screen 7a (FIG. 91). (See (F)). As is clear from the notation of FIGS. 91 to 93, during the special reach effect, the effect display relating to the special reach effect is performed without displaying the reach symbol.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the explanation effect was performed, the first operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (G)). This first-time operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and the first display screen 7a is a first effect button 63a that imitates the first effect button 63a. An effect button image and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the first effective period are displayed. In addition, the special reach effect is performed by the player performing a total of five operations, such as causing the player to operate the first effect button 63a four times and then causing the player to operate the second effect button 63b once. Since it is a state where no operation has been performed even once, when the first operation promotion production is being performed, until the first operation is performed during the special reach production, The characters "5 more times" are displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the remaining number of operations that the player should perform during the special reach effect such as "5 more times" is displayed on the third display screen 72a. May be displayed on the second display screen 71a, or may be displayed on both the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a.

  Next, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period of the first operation promotion effect, the first reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (H)). In this first increase in reliability, the reliability character as a possibility suggestion image such as "00%" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the character is energized by the light gun with the reliability character. An effect display that shows how to inject and increase the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is performed. It should be noted that FIG. 91 (H) illustrates an example in which the self character alone injects energy into the reliability character in the first reliability increase effect. In some cases, energy may be injected into the letters. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91 (H), the reliability character is displayed in blue because the reliability character indicates a numerical value with a very low jackpot reliability such as “00%”.

  In this way, when the first reliability increase effect is performed, the first result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (I)). FIG. 91 (I) exemplifies a state in which the reliability character “06%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is displayed. However, the reliability character is the jackpot reliability. Since it is still extremely low, the blue reliability character is displayed as in the case where the first reliability increase effect is being performed.

  It should be noted that FIG. 91 (I) exemplifies a state in which a result display effect indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is being performed, but the increase range of the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is It is variable, and when the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases only to 3% or the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 8 depending on the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect. In some cases, it may increase to%.

  Further, there is a correlation between the increase range of the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character and the number of characters appearing in the reliability increasing effect. The larger the number of characters appearing in the reliability increasing effect, the higher the reliability character. There is a relationship that the increase range of jackpot reliability tends to be large.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the first result display effect is performed, the second operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (A)). The second operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and like the first operation promotion effect, the first effect button image and the effective period. The gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 6%, so during the second operation promotion effect, " The blue reliability character indicating the character "06%" is also displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed once with respect to the total of five operations, the character "4 more" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. Displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period of the second operation promotion effect, the second reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (B)). In this second production of increasing the reliability, first, the reliability character indicating the character "06%" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the character and the first ally character are displayed on the reliability character. An effect display is displayed which shows how the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is increased in cooperation.

  In this way, when the second reliability increase effect is performed, the second result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (C)). FIG. 92C illustrates an example in which the reliability character of “19%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 19% is displayed. However, the reliability character is the jackpot reliability. The reliability character indicating the character “19%” is displayed in blue because it indicates that the value is still low.

  In the first-time reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (H)), only the own character has appeared, so the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is increased by only 6%. In the second reliability increasing effect (see FIG. 92 (B)), since the two characters, the self character and the first ally character, have appeared, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 13% ( = 19% -6%). In this way, the greater the number of characters that appear in the reliability increase effect, the more the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases. Therefore, the player increases the number according to the operation of the first effect button 63a. It is possible to enjoy the special reach production while expecting the character to appear.

  Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second result display effect was performed, the third operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (D)). This third-time operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and like the first and second operation promotion effects, the first effect button image. And the effective period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the second operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has risen to 19%, so during the third operation promotion effect, " The blue reliability character indicating the character "19%" is also displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed twice for the total of five operations, the character "3 more" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. Displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the third operation promotion effect, the third reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (E)). In the third reliability increasing effect, first, the reliability character indicating the character "19%" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the reliability character is independently indicated by the reliability character. A performance display showing how to increase the numerical value is performed.

  In this way, when the third reliability increase effect is performed, the third result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (F)). FIG. 92 (F) exemplifies a state in which the reliability character of "27%" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 27% is displayed, but the reliability character is the jackpot reliability. The reliability character indicating the character "27%" is displayed in green because it indicates that the character is medium.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the third result display effect is performed, the fourth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (G)). This fourth operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and similar to the first to third operation promotion effects, the first effect button image. And the effective period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the third operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 27%. Therefore, during the fourth operation promotion effect, " The green reliability character indicating the character "27%" is also displayed. In addition, here, since the operation has already been performed three times for a total of five operations, the character "2 more" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. Displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period of the fourth operation promotion effect, the fourth reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (H)). In the fourth increase in reliability, first, the reliability character indicating the character "27%" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the reliability character is compared with the own character and the first ally. An effect display is displayed in which three characters, the character and the second ally character, cooperate to increase the numerical value indicated by the reliability character.

  In this way, when the fourth reliability increase effect is performed, the fourth result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (I)). FIG. 92 (I) illustrates an example in which the reliability character of “52%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% is displayed, but the reliability character is the jackpot reliability. The reliability character indicating the character “52%” is displayed in red because it is relatively high.

  Note that in the fourth-time reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (H)), since three characters have appeared, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 25% (= 52% -27%). It is rising. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol, a reliability character (probability suggestion image) indicating that the jackpot game may be executed is displayed, and the first effect In accordance with the operation of the button 63a, the effect display for changing the possibility suggesting image is performed so that the possibility of the big hit suggested by the reliability character increases.

  Subsequently, when the fourth result display effect is performed, the reliability character displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a during the result display effect is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 93 (A)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot reliability is increased to 52% by operating the first effect button 63a four times, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 2 Since it is a relatively high value that indicates a big hit once every time, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big hit, and the second effect button at the end of the special reach effect. It is possible to give the player a strong motivation for operating 63b.

  When the reliability character is enlarged and displayed, an explanation effect is displayed in which a message explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as "push the lever to grab the jackpot!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a (Fig. 93 (B)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the explanation effect was performed, the fifth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 93 (C)). The fifth operation promotion effect is a second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b, and the second effect button 63b is imitated on the first display screen 7a. An effect button image, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "Press!", And an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the fifth effective period are displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed four times for a total of five operations, the character "last" indicating that the remaining number of operations that the player should perform is one. Is displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time is "big hit", the second effect during the effective period of the fifth operation promotion effect In response to the operation of the button 63b, for example, a hit notification effect is generated in which three effect symbols forming a doublet such as "555" are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (FIGS. 93 (D) to (F)). reference). On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol hit determination performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time is “miss”, the second effect button during the effective period of the fifth operation promotion effect. In response to the operation of 63b, a loss notification effect is generated in which the three effect symbols forming the reach missing pattern such as "565" are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (see FIGS. 93 (G) to (I)). ).

(About the jackpot reliability of the confidence character)
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the special reach effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a is blue is about 15%. It is set. Also, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final confidence character is green is set to about 35%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final confidence character is red is about 35%. Is set to. Further, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is gold is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is rainbow is 100%. Is set to.

  As is clear from this description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color of the reliability character finally becomes blue, There is a case where the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color finally becomes gold. In the latter case, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than in the former case. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is notified by the display color of the final reliability character, so that the player intuitively knows what the jackpot reliability is. It is possible to recognize.

(Effect of special reach production)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability character changes in accordance with the operation of the first effect button 63a so that the probability of the jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases. It is possible to make the player feel that he / she is more likely to be executed by himself, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the first effect button 63a.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed is different depending on the change pattern of the reliability character. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the reliability character changes, and it is possible to execute a more effective effect of changing the reliability character.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b after changing the reliability character. Therefore, the player can operate the second effect button 63b while looking at the changed reliability character and estimating how likely the jackpot game is to be executed.

(Modifications related to special reach production)
In addition, you may employ the following structures regarding a special reach production.
That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of intermittent effective periods are provided, and the probability of the jackpot that the reliability character suggests increases according to the operation of the same number of the first effect buttons 63a as the effective periods. The case of changing the reliability character has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only one effective period for allowing the player to operate the first effect button 63a is provided, and reliability is increased according to the long press operation of the first effect button 63a during this effective period. The degree character may be continuously changed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display color of the final reliability character has been described, but in other embodiments, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number indicated by the final reliability character. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the number indicated by the final reliability level character is "77" or "100", it is inevitable that the second effect button 63b is operated for the fifth operation promotion effect. It is conceivable to also employ a configuration in which the hit notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display color of the reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a, and the operation of the second effect button 63b immediately after that is suggested. The case where the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed in accordance with the above is described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, instead of performing the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 93 (C)) immediately after the final reliability character is displayed, the final reliability character is After being displayed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach effect is developed from one of the first reach to the fourth reach. In this case, for example, when the number indicated by the final reliability character reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70), the fourth reach has the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of reach effects. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration together.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the greater the number of characters that appear in the reliability increase effect, the larger the increase range of the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a plurality of movable accessory members such as a first effect character object, a second effect character object, and a third effect character object are provided, and the first effect character effect is generated during the reliability increasing effect effect. The degree of increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is larger when the second effect character object is operated than when the object is operated, and is the third effect rather than when the second effect character object is operated during the reliability increase effect. It is conceivable to adopt another configuration in which the accessory operates and the increase range of the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the reliability character is displayed as the possibility suggestion image that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed, but the possibility suggestion image is limited to the reliability confidence character. Instead of the one, for example, a gauge image may be displayed in which the number of lighting portions increases in accordance with the operation (continuous hitting or long pressing) of the first effect button 63a in one effective period.

  Up to this point, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and performs the first effect button operation promotion effect and the second effect button operation promotion effect during the special reach effect. explained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, only the first effect button 63a of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b is provided, and the second effect button operation promotion effect described in the present embodiment is applied to the first effect button 63a. You may replace with the production button operation promotion production.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the effect symbol display portion are special symbols (first special symbol or later-described below) set as the game main body in the game state according to the game state. It is assumed that the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display portion, and it is synchronized with the first special symbol by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state. It has a case and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such an aspect, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed large (main May be displayed in small size, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) which is not the subject of the game. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed according to the game state or the game situation, and There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the symbol serving as the main subject) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" capable of changing between a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter, When the result of the first win / fail judgment or the second win / fail judgment is a hit, "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the ball can be provided. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. Further, a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency (first gaming state), and a game in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting opening is higher than that in the game state. A state (second game state) and a "game state setting means" to be set can be provided. Here, 0 is included in the “predetermined frequency”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the opening number of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be one or the number of rounds may be different. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the control process of prioritizing the second special figure hold to the first special figure hold A so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is prioritized over the second special figure hold, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, the priority is not set for the completion of the first special map reservation and the completion of the second special map reservation, and the first special map reservation and the second special map reservation are sequentially deleted from the oldest stored one. It may be a control process, that is, a so-called entry sequence (memory sequence) digestion control process.

  Also, a pachinko game machine of a type that does not have probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball entry possible state and game ball entry It is equipped with a special winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry state, and the big winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter for a predetermined time when the result of the success / failure determination based on the entry into the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters the special winning opening in the ball-possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed, and it is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is a so-called 1 type / 2 type mixing machine, and when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting opening is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting opening is increased can be mentioned. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function, but the kind of jackpot probability (number) Is not limited to this, and it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Providing a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be set (selectable) at power-on of a gaming machine, for example. Good.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined for the preliminary determination based on the start-up ball. (Preliminary determination) is performed (“Starting ball entry process (S205)” (see FIG. 11, FIG. 13 and the like)), but the method of preliminary determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on a start-up ball) to be subjected to pre-determination is provided as a main control unit or sub-control. It may be provided in a RAM of a unit and determine (preliminary determination) the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit). In this case, the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area) can be erased by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Alternatively, the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit may not be determined in advance, but the acquisition information acquired based on the start entry may be determined in advance. In other words, the acquisition information may be preliminarily determined before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when the specific period is started under the situation where three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, during the specific period Displays the number of prize balls image S and the additional display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) based on the entry into the big winning opening for small hits, etc., and when the specific period ends, the prize is awarded. The production in which the number of won prize balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (summed) to the number of won prize balls in the prize ball count image C1 (total number of won prize balls, total number of won prize balls) It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (ball entry into the third starting opening 26) occurs during the specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by pre-determination (hold look ahead) The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started under a situation where four small hit holdings are stored in succession, and two small hit holdings are exhausted after the start of the specific period. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "2". Under that situation, if a new second special figure hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold ball count becomes "3" and it is pre-determined that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005) “+1” (1 is added). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit hold is exhausted and the small hit game relating to the small hit hold is completed. Or, in the same way, after the specified period has started, 2 small hit holdings have been exhausted, and the special map 2 number of reserved balls has become "2". It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number "4" occur in quick succession. In addition, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “3” is out of hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “4” is small hit in advance. It is assumed that the judgment is made. In this case, by adding "+2" (2 added) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit holding corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number "4" is exhausted and the small hit variation and small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. As described above, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed is performed. Since it is extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) that three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored are stored, and (2) that the winning lottery for the specific period is won is defined as the start of the specific period. However, the conditions for starting the specific period are not limited thereto. For example, a plurality (for example, two or more) of small hit holdings that are not continuous are stored, and a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small hit holdings are stored regardless of whether or not they are continuous. That is, the starting condition for the specific period may be set. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (start more easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C. When the big hit is the 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and the 15R big hit (15R big hit). In the case of three big hits, the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (14R start to 15R midway in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of big hit rounds that triggers the setting of state C is one type of 10 rounds, for example, if the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is state A (left hitting game), the ending period A mode selection period may occur during the period B or C (right hitting game), and the mode selection period may occur at a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway). In the latter case, the notification that the mode selection period will start from the next round (notification before selection period start) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. Further, the occurrence timing when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round which is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, 5R start to 6R end. , May be generated in any round, such as only in the final round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the big hit ending period, a notification that the mode selection period will be started later is given in the round effect of the final round before the ending period is started (before the selection period is started). You may

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of the effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, for the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes may be automatically selected by lottery or the like on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulettes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in the present embodiment, there are two kinds of effect modes in the state C (effect modes C and D), but there may be three or more kinds, and one effect mode may be selected from them.

  In addition, the mode (variation mode, stop mode, reach mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment, the effect executed with the small hit in the state C (effect mode C, D). (Small hit prefetch effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect in display mode D (display of notice image), notification screen for mode selection period, mode selection screen, etc. The modes of various effects are merely examples, and the modes of effects according to the present invention are not limited to the embodiments.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the notice image is displayed in the effect mode D, the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the advance notice image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display device, other effect display means (effect display device) such as a dot display device and a drum display device are provided, and the display mode is used in the effect mode D described above. The notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image may be configured to be executable.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes display means for performing variable display of identification information, and based on that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, a special game advantageous for a player can be executed. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

  In the gaming machine provided with the display means as described above, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means to proceed with the game. However, the player becomes tired of the game while the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to keep the interest in the game. The Reference Invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize a display in a new mode that attracts a player's interest regarding the display of identification information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and notifying the result of the variable display by the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The fluctuation display means,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that the stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display can be changed depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, while the variation display means performs the variation display of the identification information, when the variation display is stopped, the variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. The stop mode can be changed depending on the display mode of the identification information that is displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops, and can infer the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of identification information, at least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order, and a stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first A second stop mode in which the second stop order is different from the stop order,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers the execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers the execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The fluctuation display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variable display of the identification information is performed by the variable display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. Has a first stop mode and a second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and the identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode which is a trigger to execute a predetermined special game, a second display mode which is a trigger to execute another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode which does not serve as an execution trigger of. When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order ( It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the second stop order (second stop mode) Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and fuel the expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is further provided,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, further, there is a third stop mode in which the stop times of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The fluctuation display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plural symbols), execution of a special game is further performed. When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) due to the stop of the variable display is the fourth display mode, which has the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger, In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, the variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped. Therefore, when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the stop mode of the variable display should include the mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being overwhelmed, while varying the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. If it is, the predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize and indicate to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, that the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is executed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is characterized in that, compared to the first gaming state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode. That is, the second game state has a higher frequency of execution of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display of the first display mode than in the first display mode. Therefore, in the second game state, the variable display of the identification information is frequently stopped in the first stop mode. Thereby, in the second game state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is given. Can be fueled.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is constituted by a symbol of a second symbol type of the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol type and second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. Therefore, in the first game state, the symbol that cannot be configured in the first display mode because it is the symbol of the first symbol type is changed to the symbol that can be configured in the first display mode by becoming the second game state. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped but also to the symbol type.

  According to the reference invention 1 described above, with respect to the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize the display of a new mode that attracts the player's interest and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entrance (for example, the special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable ball entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit given in response to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entrance, that is, the amount of game profit to be acquired by the player (acquired profit amount) is set to a predetermined value. Is known in the display area (for example, see JP 2010-35664 A).

  However, the display of the amount of earned profit as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, and is an effect lacking in freshness. This Reference Invention 2 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a novel aspect of the production for displaying the amount of earned profit and to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
A profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance,
A profit effect executing means capable of executing a profit effect displaying the amount of profit acquired when a game profit is applied by the profit applying means,
And a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on the establishment of the control condition,
The profit effect execution means, at least, a first profit effect for additionally displaying the amount of profit to be obtained based on the entrance into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the specific period in the specific game state. It is possible to execute a second profit effect that additionally displays the amount of profit to be obtained based on the entrance into the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entrance while being controlled to the specific gaming state, and a predetermined gaming profit is given to the player in response to the ball, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of game profit to be given (acquired profit amount), of which, the second profit effect. Regarding, it is supposed to be executed during a specific period during the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit effect executed based on the entrance to the variable entrance in the specific game state and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The profit effect execution means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and the first profit in the specific period. It is possible to execute the second profit effect on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect.
After the end of the specific period, an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period in addition to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific game state, during the period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entrance into the variable entrance, and during the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the entrance into the variable entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed by using the acquired profit amount (the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) additionally displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (adding) the earned profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of profit effect by changing the display mode of the amount of profit acquired during the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition;
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display of identification information based on the acquired information,
A prior determination means capable of performing a prior determination of whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as the display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquired information is stored in the acquired information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is what

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a pre-determination as to whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information As a result, a specific display result is derived, which allows the player to enter the variable entrance. Then, the specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information are stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in the situation where it is determined that a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information can be used to enter the variable entrance. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period is characterized by ending after the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the time of the start thereof becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the specific entrance result is entered into the variable entrance. After that, the specific period ends. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The pre-judgment means can execute the pre-judgment even during the specific period,
It is characterized in that the specific period is extended based on a new determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the pre-determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the pre-determination can be executed even during the specific period, the pre-determination is executed for the newly acquired acquisition information during the specific period, and the acquisition information is the specific acquisition information. If the determination result to that effect is obtained, the specific period is extended. As a result, the period in which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is different depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information in the specific game state, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of stored pieces of specific acquisition information when the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

  According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to realize an effect in a new mode as an effect for displaying the amount of earned profit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is widely known in which identification information is variably displayed and a special game can be executed based on a display result of the variably display being a specific display result. Some gaming machines of this type are configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the effect mode can be selected, it is possible to set various times such as during the variable display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. Further, in a configuration in which it is possible to select an effect mode during a special game, there is one in which the effect mode after the special game is selected (for example, see JP 2006-174956 A).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the occurrence mode of the selectable time period and the notification mode indicating the occurrence are uniform, and there is a problem of lacking freshness. there were. This Reference Invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a novel mode. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
And a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to be able to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is finished can be selected from the plurality of effect modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a first notification means for notifying before the selection period is started in a round game before the predetermined round game is provided. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is finished can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, after announcing in advance in the round game before that that the production mode can be selected in the predetermined round game during the special game (a selection period occurs), the production mode selection period It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as when it occurs (starts). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, a manual selection in which the player selects and inputs one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. An automatic selection in which any one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
Second informing means for informing during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game,
When the predetermined round game is finished and the next round game is started, a third notifying means for notifying before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period is terminated during a round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game When is started, the notification before the end of the selection period is performed in the round game (the round game next to the predetermined round game). Then, the selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is performed (during the round game next to the predetermined round game). Therefore, when the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification before the selection period is started in the round game before the predetermined round game (the notification by the first notification means), and the predetermined Special game by notification during the selection period performed by the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed by the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means) It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. Thus, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and since the above-mentioned notification is performed from before the start of the selection period to the end thereof, the player selects the production mode. It is possible to avoid losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the second game state. The generation time of the selection period is different from the case where the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display in the first game state becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In the state, the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, and the generation time of the selection period of the effect mode is different. As a result, it becomes possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable time thereafter depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above,
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all round games constituting the special game are finished. Notification will be given during the selection period,
When the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, all the round games constituting the special game are finished. After that, a production mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game in the special game is executed. In this case, a notification mode by the above-mentioned first notification means (a notification before the start of the selection period), a notification by a second notification means (a notification during the selection period) and a 3 The notification by the notification means (the notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed in the first game state, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all round games. Thereby, depending on whether the game state when the specific display result is derived is the first game state or the second game state, it is possible to make the mode of the effect mode selection different, and give the player a different impression. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of types of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation timing of the effect mode selection period is different depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it becomes possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable time depending on the type of special game to be executed, and prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of round games is larger than that of the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs and the notification during the selection period is performed after all round games constituting the first special game are finished,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game are finished. After that, a production mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game having a relatively large number of round games constituting the special game is executed, the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the above-mentioned first notification means (the notification before the selection period starts), the second notification means (the notification during the selection period), and the third notification means (the before the selection period ends) Notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode after the end of all round games. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the time all round games are completed. As a result, the mode of effect mode selection can be made different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give the player a different impression. Become.

  According to Reference Invention 3 described above, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new mode, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of entering the ball is reduced in the low base state, and the frequency of entering the ball is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, there is a game that aims at the first starting opening, and in the high base state, that aims at the second starting opening. In addition, when there is a big hit game or a high base state, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right hitting game in which the player aims at the right side area of the game area. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state game is sharpened. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that the various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and that an efficient game can be progressed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the game efficiency. Also, to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
With a specific starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable start port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting opening,
Identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable start opening is in the second state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter,
A gaming machine provided with: a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance, which are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting port, a first variable ball entrance, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball entrance are provided at predetermined points in the game area, and these are upstream of the game area. A specific starting port, a first variable ball inlet, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball inlet are arranged in this order downstream from. This enables an efficient game progression.

  Specifically, in order to progress the game smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). It is placed at the top of the mouth. Thereby, first, the possibility that the variable start port will be in the second state (open state) is increased. Further, by making the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific start opening flow down the game area after that (gate 28), the subsequent game will proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball inlet downstream of the specific starting port, the ball can be quickly entered when the special game is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Further, by providing the first variable ball inlet upstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the variable start port that is in the second state during the special game, and enters the first variable ball inlet. It is also possible to prevent a situation in which entry is blocked.

  In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entrance port, the variable start port in the second state can be used unless the first variable entrance port is in the enterable state in the special game. , It becomes possible to enter the flowing game ball with priority over the other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the variable starting port is not in the second state even though the variable starting port is in the second state. Further, by arranging the second variable ball inlet port downstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the second variable ball port based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start port. Since the frequency changes, it becomes possible to add various game characteristics. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special mode, there are a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits obtainable than the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special mode and a second special mode as modes of the stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, and the special games are the first special game and the second special mode. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game that has more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is set in the enterable state (open state) and the second special game. Then, the second variable entrance is made ready for entry.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port relating to this is arranged in the most upstream of these ball entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable ball inlet port downstream of the specific starting port, the ball can be quickly entered when the first special game with a large amount of game profit is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be played in a short time. Enables acquisition. Further, next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable ball inlet, the second variable state is changed unless the first variable ball inlet is in the ball enterable state in the special game. It is possible to enter the game ball flowing down into the starting port in preference to other game balls. In addition, the second variable entrance which is ready to enter in the second special game with a small amount of game profit is arranged downstream of the variable start opening, and various game characteristics can be added. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, different stop symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, profit that can be obtained, and variable entrance for opening) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second gaming state, a game ball is inserted into the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet port is arranged on the downstream side of the variable starting port. By making it difficult to enter,
The possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable ball inlet when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start opening at a low frequency and a second game state in which the game ball enters at a frequency higher than the first game state. , The variable start port arranged on the upstream side becomes the second state (open state), which makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state is the second variable ball inlet than the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the game frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming profit that can be obtained by the entry of the gaming ball (for example, the prize ball given by the entry of one gaming ball) is second from the variable starting opening. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down easily enters the second variable ball inlet port on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable start port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable start port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects to enter the second variable entrance, which has more game profits than the variable start opening, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first gaming state. , Enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the game profit that can be acquired when the same second special game occurs in the first game state and the second game state different, diversify the game property, and enhance the fun of the game. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state does not change by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the second special game execution and the game state after the second special game execution are the same game state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state. By generating a game, it is possible to obtain more game profit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6.
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening,
It is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are concurrently displayed. (At the same time) variable display is possible. As a result, in the simultaneous variation gaming machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, it is possible to diversify the game nature while providing smooth progress of the game. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of the reference invention, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game while allowing the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and when a jackpot game is executed, the normal state is changed to a probable variation state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become a gaming machine to be transitioned. Further, in the advantageous state, when the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is set. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect of preventing the game from getting tired by the transition of the gaming state was exhibited.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the mode of transition of the game state and the game state after the transition are uniform, and the interest in the game has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies game play and enhances amusement of a game by giving a characteristic to a game state transition mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the variable display result of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready for entering A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. When the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is high in the high probability and the second game state. When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the high probability and second game state to the high probability and first game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As the identification result, a second identification result is provided,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of fluctuation display of and reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and the second game state to the predetermined probability and the first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the interest of the game. Further, as a result, the player can expect the game state to change to the second game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common effect, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the probability of winning is high and the first gaming state is higher than the probability of winning in the second gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more gaming profits. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of the present Reference Invention 5, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the variable display result of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready for entering A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result,
A gaming machine comprising: a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area at a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting opening is provided in a second game area in which a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter.
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port, the first identification result is not included,
It is characterized by having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first launch strength, and the second starting opening is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. . Then, when the first identification result is reached, if the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display of and reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the interest of the game. The variable display result of the first identification information does not have the first identification result, and the variable display result of the second identification information has the first identification result. As a result, different game qualities can be provided depending on whether a game ball is inserted into the first starting opening and a game sphere is inserted into the second starting opening. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As the identification result, a second identification result is provided,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state,
It is characterized in that it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second game state is When the specified number of times is reached, the game state changes from a predetermined probability and second game state to a predetermined probability and first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the interest of the game. Further, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common effect, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
As the identification result, there is a third identification result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state is not changed until the next specific result is obtained. And
It is characterized in that it has the third identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as the result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, if the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first game state as the third specific result, the game state is maintained at the high probability and the first game state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to do. Thereby, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is nothing that changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state based on the variable display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability and guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state until a specific result is obtained next time. Further, as a result, in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, diversify the playability, and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the probability of winning is high and the first gaming state is higher than the probability of winning in the second gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more gaming profits. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 6, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the variable display result of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready for entering A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
As the identification result, a first identification result and a fourth identification result are included,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the display count reaches the second count, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Then, as a result of the first identification, when the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display with and becomes the first number, the game state changes from the high probability and second game state to the high probability and first game state. Also, when the fourth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of fluctuation display with and becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

  In the present aspect, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a second probability. It is supposed to change to one gaming state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of fluctuating display of the first identification information, when the number of times of fluctuating display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state. It is also possible to change from a high probability to the first game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of change display of the second identification information, when the number of times of change display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the game state has a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed to a high probability and the first gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
As the identification result, a second identification result and a fifth identification result are included,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the game state changes to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the fifth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state is changed to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second specific result, the first probability is set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of fluctuation display of and becomes the second number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and the second game state to the predetermined probability and the first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times has passed and the second number of times has passed during execution of the common effect, It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state when the game state changes at the second number of times than when the game state changes at the first number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the second number of times than when the change timing of the gaming state is at the first number. It is highly probable and highly likely to change to the first game state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number, the player expects that the game state will be maintained without being changed, and the player reaches the second number while the game state remains in the second game state. At this time, the player is expected to play with a high probability and expectation of changing to the first gaming state. Thereby, in the second gaming state, there is a point to increase the expectation of a plurality of times. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes at the first number of times than when the gaming state changes at the second number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the first number of times than when the change timing of the gaming state is at the second number. It is highly probable and highly likely to change to the first game state. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player expects that the game state will change and plays the game. When the game state reaches the second number of times while the second game state remains, it is possible. Although the sex is lower than that of the first time, the game is performed with the expectation that it will change to the first game state with a high probability. Thereby, in the second gaming state, there is a point to increase the expectation of a plurality of times. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the probability of winning is high and the first gaming state is higher than the probability of winning in the second gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more gaming profits. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the variable display result of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready for entering A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result,
A first condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, and a second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, A second identification information variable time determining means capable of setting
In the second condition state, the average time of the fluctuation display of the second identification information to be determined is shorter than that in the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the first It is characterized by having two condition states, the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, a first condition state and a first condition state. Second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. Further, as the game state, a predetermined probability and a first game state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, a high probability And, in the game state in which the second game state and the second condition state are set, and the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the variable display result of the second identification information is the identification result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the identification result. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the identification result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by a special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the profit, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. is there. As a result, the player expects to be set in a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is relatively short. You will play a game. Further, even in such a second condition state, it is possible to set a plurality of game states, diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a third starting port into which game balls can enter,
It is characterized in that the second identification information is variably displayed based on a ball entering the third starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with a third starting opening in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information is variably displayed by entering the variable second start opening or the third start opening, which makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting port, the first variable ball inlet, and the second variable ball inlet, the second game in which the game ball shot at the second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by launching a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area in which the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the player can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is played by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set and the game is played. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, it is possible to set a plurality of game states, diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
In the second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable ball entrance, and the second variable ball entrance, a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength enters. Provided in the possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by launching a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing strength, and the second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable entrance and the second The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area in which the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is played by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set and the game is played. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, it is possible to set a plurality of game states, diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5.
The high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming state in which the probability of winning and the first gaming state and the second conditional state are higher than those of the high probability and the second gaming state and the second conditional state, the gaming profit that can be acquired is large. There is. Thus, the player expects that the game state will be set to the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state, and advances the game to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state, by inserting a game ball into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, the second starting port is more than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter into the second variable entrance, which is arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is determined with the high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state are set higher than the state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are higher and the second probability. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the variable display result of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready for entering A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, the high probability and the second gaming state, Then
The second variable ball entrance is characterized in that when the game state is the high probability and the first game state, the frequency of entering the game ball is high.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, as the gaming state, there are a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, of which With a high probability and in the first game state, the frequency of entering the second variable entrance is increased. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting opening, the first variable ball entrance, and the second variable ball entrance, the second game area in which a game ball shot with a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Is provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, by shooting a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game.
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area. By this, a gaming machine for playing a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a game state in which the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played by shooting a game ball in the second game area,
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball inlet is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state, which is higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area in which the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the player can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a game ball is shot in the first gaming area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, or a high probability and a second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is given. It is supposed to play the game by displaying it in a variable manner. Also, in a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to perform a game, that is, in a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state, The game state in which the game ball enters the variable ball entrance with the highest frequency is defined as a high probability and first game state.

  Thus, when the player enters a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to play a game, the player expects that the game state is the high probability and the first game state to proceed with the game. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or 9-2.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 10)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various entertainments are performed to increase the player's expectation during the variable display of the identification information, so that the gaming enjoyment is improved. As such an effect, for example, information relating to the variable display of the identification information currently being executed and the variable display of the identification information executed thereafter (for example, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the display result becomes the specific display result, the display) An effect for displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until the result is derived is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2002-239122).

  However, the above-described effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information is already adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment of the game. The present reference invention 10 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of a player as an effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information. , The aim is to improve the fun of playing games.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
State control means capable of controlling the game state when the variation display of the identification information is performed,
Special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
During the variable display of the identification information, an information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect that displays information about the game after the end of the variable display is provided,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state continues even after the end of the variable display.
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a more unfavorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two pieces of information among the first to third information when starting the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when executing the information display effect that displays the information about the game after the end of the variable display during the variable display of the identification information, when the information display effect is started, the variable display First information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state is continued after the end of the fluctuation display, and the game state after the end of the fluctuation display is It is possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the game state is disadvantageous. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It will be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above,
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information and may display the second information and the third information when starting the information display effect. It is what

  According to such a gaming machine, when starting the information display effect, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed. Therefore, when the player starts the information display effect, if the first information and the second information are displayed, it can be estimated that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development may be disadvantageous. When the information and the third information are displayed, it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
As the game state, at least a first game state and a second game state,
The second special game is a special game that has more game profit that can be given than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls the game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means is capable of executing the information display effect in the second gaming state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state continues even after the end of the variable display.
The third information is characterized in that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state, and a second special game. The game is a special game that has more game profits that can be obtained than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the game state after the first special game is over is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game is over is the second game state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and of the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, by the information display effect, information (game development) on the subsequent game based on the game in the second game state (variable display of identification information) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above,
Equipped with a fluctuating effect execution means capable of executing a fluctuating effect while the identification information is fluctuatingly displayed,
The variation effect execution means is capable of executing a variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern,
As the variation effect pattern, at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern,
When the second special game can be executed by the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern during the variable display.
The information display effect execution means,
It is possible to display the first information and the second information when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed,
When the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variation effect based on the predetermined variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display of the identification information, and at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect pattern can be used as the variation effect pattern. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the variable display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game can be executed because the result is the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed, the information display in the variable display is performed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the time of starting the effect, and when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information can be displayed at the time of starting the information display effect in the variable display. It is possible to display the second information and the third information. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. This makes it possible to match the information display effect and the fluctuation effect that are executed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after starting the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be, depending on the information display mode thereafter. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the information display effect is started.

  According to the reference invention 10 described above, it is possible to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a special game capable of giving a player a predetermined game profit can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is general to perform various effects along with progress of games such as variable display of identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one in which an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result is performed as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154657).

  However, the configuration for performing the character effect by the reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many game machines, and its execution mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment of the game. This Reference Invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine provided with the character effect by giving the feature to the execution mode of the character effect. Especially.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
Special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
A game machine provided with a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The effect execution means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a variable display of identification information and a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed along with the variable display of the identification information and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to make the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game relevant, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above,
Equipped with state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state when the variable display of the identification information is changed to the specific game state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variable display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed in association with a game and a case where it is executed in accordance with a special game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result, the first special game can be executed,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits that can be given than the second special game,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be executed becomes executable, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variation display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variation display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or the second special game is performed, amusement of the game is achieved. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
The game ball is provided with a second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
In the first special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first variable ball entrance,
In the second special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific game state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable ball entrance. In the second special game which becomes possible and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance. In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game balls into the second variable ball entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state. As a result, in a situation where the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed, the second variable input accompanying the second special game is performed. It is possible to attract the interest of the player to the insertion of the game ball into the ball opening and the performance of the character, and to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the entertainment appeal of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
A probability setting unit capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), a predetermined probability, and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game will be executed becomes high, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect accompanying the second special game will be executed becomes high. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the second special game is played.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, there is a high probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result, and therefore the possibility of executing the character effect associated with the second special game. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanied by the variable display of the identification information under a high level. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
As a character displayed on the predetermined display unit, a first character and a second character are provided,
As the character effects, there are a first character effect and a second character effect,
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect produced by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect execution means,
When performing the character effect along with the variable display of the identification information, execute the first character effect,
When the character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect, and the first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect including the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the special game. As a result, the character effect can be executed in a mode suitable for the game situation, and the player's interest in the character effect can be attracted.

  According to the reference invention 11 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the game machine provided with the character effect by giving the feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference invention 12)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
A first countdown effect for displaying a first effect image indicating a number in the first display area and counting down the number indicated by the first effect image;
A first suggestion effect that suggests that the special game may be executed in response to the end of the first countdown effect,
A second countdown effect for displaying a second effect image indicating a number in the second display area and counting down the number indicated by the second effect image;
According to the end of the second countdown effect, it is possible to execute a second suggestion effect that suggests that the special game may be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are compared, respective effect images are displayed in different display areas, and when the countdown effect is finished, different suggestive effects are obtained. Can be performed. Therefore, compared to the case where there is one display area of the effect image related to the countdown effect, and the case where there is only one effect executed in response to the end of the countdown, the variation of the effect becomes richer, and as a result, , It is possible to execute a highly entertaining production.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1.
The display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other, for example, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are simultaneously executed. However, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. For this reason, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the attraction of the effect is lowered due to the player's failure to recognize that two types of countdown effects are being executed at the same time.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2,
The effect control means,
It is characterized in that the speed of counting down the numbers shown by the first effect image and the speed of counting down the numbers shown by the second effect image can be different from each other.

  According to such a gaming machine, the speed at which the number shown by the first effect image is counted down and the speed at which the number shown by the second effect image is counted down are different from each other, so that the countdown effect is repeatedly performed. It is possible to effectively prevent the problem that the effect becomes monotonous, and as a result, the attractiveness of the performance deteriorates.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-3,
While the initial value of the number shown by the second effect image is fixed, the initial value of the number shown by the first effect image is variable.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable, the first countdown effect becomes monotonous by fixing this number, and as a result, the effect is reduced. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the interest is lowered.

(Reference invention 13)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute the first specific effect that suggests that the special game is relatively likely to be executed,
As the possibility suggesting image suggesting that the possibility is present, when the possibility suggesting image in the first display mode is displayed, and the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than in the first display mode. There are times when displaying a possibility suggestion image of a mode,
It is characterized in that the possibility suggesting image of the second display mode is displayed more easily than the possibility suggesting image of the first display mode is displayed. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the possibility suggesting image in the second display mode is displayed, the first specific effect is more easily executed than when the possibility suggesting image in the first display mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to display the possibility suggestion image in the second display mode instead of the first display mode, and the synergistic effect of the effect of displaying the possibility suggestion image and the first specific effect Thus, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1.
When the determination is made by the determination means, a symbol display control means is provided for displaying the symbols in a predetermined symbol display means in a variable manner and then stopping the symbols indicating the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a plurality of second specific effects different from the first specific effect, which suggests that the possibility is relatively high,
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects can be executed during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the determination. While there is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the determination. It is characterized by restricting

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed only when it is determined that the special game is to be executed. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbol once. , It is possible to expect the player to perform a plurality of second specific effects in addition to the first specific effect, and to obtain an even higher effect by the synergistic effect of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Is possible.

(Reference invention 14)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a stage effect that gradually changes a predetermined stage effect image,
When the stage effect is executed, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect, and after the stage effect is started, the stage effect image is changed to the first display area. Is displayed in a different second display area to change the stage effect image.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image is displayed in the first display area when the stage effect is started, the player watching the first display area does not notice the start of the stage effect. It is possible to effectively suppress such a problem. In addition, since the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the stage effect, it is different from the case where the display area in which the stage effect image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to execute a stage production that is rich in interest and highly entertaining. In addition, since the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the stage effect, it is possible to execute another effect using the first display area, for example. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high effect by a synergistic effect of the stage effect and another effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1.
The stage effect image displayed in the first display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display area.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image displayed in the first display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display area, these effect images have the same size. The player recognizes that the stage effect has started, as compared with the case where the stage effect image displayed in the second display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the first display area. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the problem that the original effect of the stage effect cannot be obtained due to the fact that the player does not notice that the stage effect has started.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 or Reference Invention 14-2.
The stage effect is an effect that can be changed stepwise up to any of the predetermined number of steps with a predetermined number of steps as an upper limit,
The effect control means,
According to the change of the stage effect up to the predetermined number of stages, a suggestion effect is suggested which indicates that the special game may be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the suggestive effect is executed when the stage effect changes to the predetermined number of steps, the player is expected to change the step effect to the upper limit of the predetermined number of steps. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect of the stage production and the suggestion production.

(Reference invention 15)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Notification effect executing means for executing a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed by the determination means When,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the hit notification effect is relatively likely to be executed,
The production is executed in any one of a plurality of production modes including a first production mode and a second production mode that suggests that the hit notification production is more likely to be executed than the first production mode,
It is characterized in that it is possible to give advance notice that the suggestive effect will be executed by the effect performed in the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode, and is performed in the second effect mode. Depending on the effect, it may be announced that the suggestion effect will be executed. Therefore, by executing the effect in the second effect mode, it is possible to expect the player to perform the suggestive effect and the winning notification effect, and it is possible to obtain a high effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1,
The effect control means,
As an effect performed in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a step effect in which a predetermined number of steps is set as an upper limit and any one of the predetermined number of steps or less can be gradually developed.
When the suggestive effect is not executed, execute the step effect to develop and end to less than the predetermined number of steps,
It is characterized in that, when the suggestive effect is executed, the step effect, which is developed to the predetermined number of steps and ended, is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stage effect that has reached the predetermined number of stages and is completed in the second effect mode is executed, the suggestion effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to make a player expecting that the suggestive effect is executed to develop the stage effect to a predetermined number of stages, and a high synergistic effect of the stage effect and the suggestive effect is achieved. It is possible to obtain a staging effect.

(Reference invention 16)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A symbol display control means for variably displaying the symbols on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying the symbols indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display a variation suggestion image that suggests that the variation of the symbol is being displayed, and it is possible to execute a possibility suggestion production that suggests that the special game may be executed,
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed while the variation suggestion image is being displayed, the possibility that the special game is executed from the display manner of the variation suggestion image from the first display manner is the first display manner. It is characterized in that it is possible to change to a second display mode that suggests that the display is higher than the above.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the change suggestion image may change from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the possibility suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the variation suggestion image can effectively improve the player's expectation for the execution of the special game, and as a result, , High performance effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1
As the possibility suggestion production is executed while the variation suggestion image is displayed, the display mode of the variation suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. There is a second case that does not
In the first case, the probability that the special game will be executed is higher than in the second case.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is more special that the display mode of the change suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggesting effect is executed, as compared with the case where it does not change. The game is easy to be executed. Therefore, by executing the possibility suggesting effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change suggesting image, as compared with the case of changing the display mode of the change suggesting image regardless of the possibility suggesting effect. It is possible to obtain a higher production effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or 16-2.
The possibility suggesting effect is a moving effect in which a plurality of characters move on the display screen,
The moving effects include a moving effect of a first effect pattern in which the specific characters are not included in the plurality of characters, and a moving effect of a second effect pattern in which the specific characters are included in the plurality of characters,
The effect control means,
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, it is possible to execute both the movement effect of the first effect pattern and the movement effect of the second effect pattern,
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed, while the execution of the movement effect of the second effect pattern is restricted. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed both when it is determined to execute the special game and when it is determined not to execute the special game, whereas the second effect is generated. The movement effect of the pattern is characterized in that it is not executed when it is determined that the special game is not executed, and is executed when it is determined that the special game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to perform the movement effect of the second effect pattern rather than the movement effect of the first effect pattern, and only the first effect pattern is prepared as the effect pattern of the move effect. It is possible to execute a moving effect that is rich in variation of effects and more entertaining as compared with the case where it is not performed.

(Reference invention 17)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A symbol display control means for variably displaying the symbols on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying the symbols indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display a variation suggestion image that suggests that the variation of the symbol is being displayed,
While the variation suggestion image is being displayed, it is possible to execute a change effect of changing the variation suggestion image into an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
It is characterized in that a predetermined operation-corresponding effect is executed in response to the operation of the operation means while the operation promotion image is being displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a change effect in which the change suggestion image is changed to the operation promotion image may be executed. Therefore, the variation suggestion image has both the function of suggesting that the variation of the pattern is being displayed and the function of changing to the operation promotion image, effectively improving the interest of the production using the variation suggestion image. It is possible to

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1.
Reach effects executed during the variable display of the symbols include a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
While the change effect can be executed during the second reach effect, the change effect is restricted from being executed during the first reach effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the change effect is not executed unless the second reach effect is developed, compared with the case where the change effect is not executed during the second reach effect, it is possible to develop the second reach effect. It is possible to effectively improve the expectation of the player.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment by the judging means up to a predetermined number,
The effect control means,
When the right to judge is held, a holding image indicating that is displayed,
Before the start of the second reach effect during the variable display of the symbol, both the change suggestion image and the hold image are displayed, while during the second reach effect, the change is performed without displaying the hold image. The feature is that a suggestion image is displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the second reach effect, the change suggestion image is displayed without displaying the hold image, and the change effect in which the change suggestion image is changed to the operation promotion image is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation suggestion image as compared with the case where the held image is displayed during the second reach effect, and for example, the player was paying attention to the held image. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the change effect due to the cause.

(Reference invention 18)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A symbol display control means for variably displaying the symbols on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying the symbols indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
While the variable display of the symbol is displayed, a possibility suggestion image indicating that the special game may be executed is displayed, and the possibility suggested by the possibility suggestion image is displayed according to the operation of the operation means. The possibility suggesting image is changed so that the possibility becomes higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility suggestion image changes so that the possibility that the possibility suggestion image suggests (the special game is executed) increases in accordance with the operation of the operation means, It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is highly likely to execute the special game, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the production using the operation means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1.
The effect control means,
There is a case where the possibility suggesting image is changed by the first change pattern and a case where the possibility suggesting image is changed by the second change pattern.
It is characterized in that the probability that the special game is executed is different from each other when the possibility suggestion image changes in the first change pattern and in the second change pattern.

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility that the special game is executed is different depending on the change pattern of the possibility suggesting image, so that the player can be made aware of how the possibility suggesting image changes. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a more effective effect of changing the possibility suggesting image.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The effect control means,
Depending on the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggesting image, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed. It is characterized by executing.

  According to such a gaming machine, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggesting image. Therefore, the player can operate the operation means while observing the possibility of executing the special game by looking at the changed possibility suggesting image.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7b production symbol display area (production symbol display section), 8 production symbol, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display device (1st special symbol display part), 41b 2nd special symbol display device (2nd special symbol display part), 80 main control board (main control part), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control part), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a stage effect that gradually changes a predetermined stage effect image,
When executing the stage effect, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect, and after the stage effect is started, the stage effect image is referred to as the first display area. Display in a different second display area to change the stage effect image,
The stage effect is an effect that can be changed stepwise up to any of the predetermined number of steps with a predetermined number of steps as an upper limit,
The effect control means,
It is possible to change the display color of the stage effect image displayed in the second display area,
The first case in which the stage effect is executed that changes to the predetermined number of steps and ends at the step, and the step effect that changes to less than the predetermined number of steps and ends at the step is executed. In both of the above-mentioned second cases, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the special game may be executed,
In the first case, the probability that the suggestive effect is executed is higher than that in the second case .

Claims (1)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a stage effect that gradually changes a predetermined stage effect image,
A game machine characterized in that, when the stage effect is executed, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect.

Images